Home

Nissan 2010 Z Coupe Automobile User Manual

image

Contents

1. WHA1128 Adjust air flow direction for the driver s and pas senger s side vents center vents and rear passengers if so equipped vents 3 by moving the vent slide and or vent assemblies Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 13 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual Type A if so equipped AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up ONOARWN 1 2 3 4 5 g e w o E x c E 8 7 6 WHA1406 Type A Fan speed control dial CONTROLS Front window defroster button Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button Temperature control dial Max A C button Air flow control buttons Air conditioner ON OFF button 4 14 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Fan control dial The fan control dial
2. Les ae LHA0556 MAINTENANCE NOTICE_ Maintenance of the Following Item is Due Engine Oil LHA0483 Resetting the maintenance interval The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte nance intervals can be reset to O miles kilome ters Select the Reset key using the joystick and press the ENTER button Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Display Maintenance Notification key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 4 6 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met e Reset key is selected e Display Maintenance Notification is set to OFF The maintenance interval is set again TIRE PRESSURE Se Ze LHA0557 Tire pressure i
3. WRS0914 Foward Facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a child restraint in the front center bench seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraints earlier in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0915 Forward Facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manu facturer s instructions f
4. 2 37 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWINE ee ath ed aoa Ae Ee eS 2 28 Recorders Eventidata lt socas 2 es gne a Bk ta 9 42 Refrigerant recommendation aaao 9 7 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 10 Remote controller See NISSAN mobile entertainment system 4 58 Remote keyless entry system 3 7 Reporting safety defects US only 9 41 Resetting the fuel economy 4 5 Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 4 4 S Safety Child safety rear doorlock 3 7 Child seat belts 1 24 1 30 1 34 1 41 Reporting safety defects US only 9 41 Screen See NISSAN mobile entertainment SYSTEM soit ce ad ae a ee Rn S 4 58 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Seat belt Child safety ds 0 26 aoe ae Lae ed 1 22 Infants and small children 1 23 Injured Person 2 2 0 eee 1 16 Largerchildren 08 1 23 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 13 Pregnant women 00 1 16 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 58 Seat belt extenders 1 21 Seat belt maintenance 1 21 Seat Dells srar kae ee ee ie 1 13 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 19 Three point type with retractor 1 16 Two point type without retractor rear center lap belt 2 2 2 2 1 19 Seat belt warning light 2 18 Seatback pockets
5. 7 shee i CD DVD RADIO Pippi Aha 12 8 10 CD6 CHANGER 13 LOAD G 3 a tags PUSH 14 PUSH POWER AUDIO a 1 2 3 4 5 6 tag ReDeS VOLUME TUNES TRACK 17 WHA0867 Type D 1 SEEK TRACK button 6 H M button clock set buttons 2 TUNE FOLDER CAT button 7 PRESET A B C button 3 Display 8 CD DVD button 4 SCAN RPT button 9 RADIO button 5 DISP button 10 AUX button 4 44 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Ii 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 REAR ON OFF button Mil speaker control button LOAD button CD insert slot CD eject button POWER VOLUME control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons Tuning and AUDIO control knob BASS MID TREBLE FADE and BALANCE No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Z PRESET A B C DISP CLOCK Q SEEK M TRack PA e RADIO 88 CAT a FOLDER gt i ax gg SCAN gog RPT 7 7 LOAD 4 6 10 HS i al yw DWR 11 MP3 WMA 6CD CHANGER G 1 2 4 mjs 888 6 JG VOL 13 14 WHA1127 Type E 1 PRESET A B C
6. WRS0368 Type A Stowed position Resting position ARMRESTS if so equipped To use the armrests on the captain s chairs type A if so equipped pull them down to the resting position To use the center armrest on the bench seat type B if so equipped pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it down to the resting position Type B 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0425 HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head resiraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision a aja i JOE lN 3 LRS2020 LRS0887 WRS0134 The illustration shows the seating positions Components Adjustment equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the
7. WRS0802 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 WRS0256 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS 1 30 Safety Seats seat
8. 0004 2 44 Seats Adjustment 00004 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 24 Front s atse so eos etal Bare 1 2 Heated seats 0 2 2 0 000005 2 35 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Security indicator light 2 20 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Self adjusting brakes 1 00 8 21 Service manual order form 9 43 Servicing air conditioner 4 30 Setting button i ee a 4 7 Shift lock release 2 0 ee ee 5 18 Shifting Automatic transmission 5 14 5 16 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 19 Side air bag system See supplemental side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems 1 57 Sonar Rear systemi q 24 regnr dur arinei ws 5 36 Spark plug replacement 8 17 Speedometer 0 000008 2 5 SRS warning label 0004 1 59 Starting Before starting the engine 5 11 Jump starting se sses stane saapa 6 8 Precautions when starting and driving 10 5 Pushistarting 24 a ee e 6 det er aN 6 10 Starting the engine 5 12 Startup screen 2 eee 4 3 Steering Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 31 Tilting steering wheel 3 14 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 54 Stoplight se ce rera d bee a eee dee 8 28 Storages sa haa Raw Ea als 2 40 Lockable bedside
9. Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may result in accidents fire or electrical shock Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS if so equipped 1 3 DEST MAP Aydt ORAS 4 5 6 78 10 WHA0854 ID brightness control button P 4 13 2 BACK previous button P 4 3 3 Joystick and ENTER button P 4 3 4 SETTING button P 4 7 4 2 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems TRIP button P 4 4 DEST button ROUTE button MAP button 9 GUIDE VOICE button 10 Q 11 Q For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual if so equipped Zoom out button zoom in button ACAUTION e The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of m
10. Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations 4 68 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition s
11. A CAUTION Install only one cleat per section of channel e Applying loads at angles to the cleats greater then 45 or loads greater than 150 Ibs header and floor channels or 200 Ibs side channels may cause damage to the channel or bed Technical and consumer information 9 19 1 correct installation 2 incorrect installation AWARNING Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels Doing this could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts which could result in serious injury 9 20 Technical and consumer information LTI0123 WTI10119 A CAUTION Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting Use the channel end stoppers to help se cure items in the channels from sliding off the end of the truck bed Channel end stoppers The channel end stoppers should be used to help prevent accessories installed in the channels from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck bed They must be installed so they are properly seated in the detents in the channel Install the channels end stoppers as follows 1 Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed Properly store the channel protectors Loosen the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided wrench and insert it into the channel Position the end stopper to the desired lo cation on the channel
12. WRS0422 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain and roll over air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im pacted They may not inflate in certain side colli sions Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers As a result certain vehicle movements for example during severe off roading may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Car
13. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove
14. When the PLAY PAUSE button on the player or the PLAY button on the remote control is pressed the player will play In play mode the display will briefly show gt on the upper left corner of the display gt gt PP FF Fast Forward REW Remote control only Press the FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE buttons to carry out the fast forward or fast re verse presentation at 5 times normal play speed Press the FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE buttons again or PLAY button to resume the normal play speed lt lt Ppl NEXT CHAPTER PREVIOUS CHAPTER Remote control only When the PPI NEXT CHAPTER button is pressed while the DVD is playing the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through programs The DVD will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the 44 PREVIOUS CHAPTER button is pressed the program being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through pro grams The DVD will go back the number of times the button is pressed ar Lr When the PLAY PAUSE button on the player or the PAUSE button on the remote control is pressed the player will pause playing of the media In pause mode the player will show I on the upper left corner of the display until the player is changed to another mode EE STOP Press the STOP button once to stop playing the media The display will show W in t
15. 2 2 Instruments and controls j 11 12 13 14 15 Vents P 4 13 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 29 Steering wheel switch for audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if so equipped P 4 54 P 4 70 Instrument brightness control P 2 32 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 45 P 2 35 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 20 Shift selector column if so equipped P 5 16 Ignition switch P 5 9 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 2 Audio system controls P 4 30 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 45 Glove box P 2 42 Climate controls P 4 14 P 4 21 P 4 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Aux jack if so equipped P 4 52 Power outlet P 2 38 Heated seat switch if so equipped P 2 35 Cup holder P 2 45 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch if so equipped P 2 36 Shift selector console if so equipped P 5 16 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 34 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 54 Power outlet P 2 38 AWD shift switch if so equipped P 5 27 Windshield wiper washer s
16. 3 4 5 POWER button STOP button NEXT TRACK CHAPTER and PREVI OUS TRACK CHAPTER button TITLE button ENTER button 15 16 17 18 DISPLAY button MODE button SUBTITLE button AUDIO button ANGLE button CLEAR button PAUSE button PLAY button FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE button MENU button NAVIGATION keys BACK button NUMERIC KEYPAD REMOTE CONTROL Refer to Playing a digital video disc DVD later in this section for the function of each button 4 58 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems LHA0315 FLIP DOWN SCREEN The flip down screen has a wireless remote con trol receiver 1 located at the bottom of the screen ACAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water e The screen rotates down to view and up into the housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched securely into the housing when stored OF SAA0720 SAA0721 Headphones Power ON OFF Press the power button to turn the headphones on or off Volume control Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol ume The headphones will automatically be turned off in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
17. CXI USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD if so equipped AWARNING e For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury ACAUTION Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neu tral position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above o
18. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 Instruments and controls 2 59 MEMO 2 60 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KOYSicova evi cae Coote eae dna aoe ae 8 3 2 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys ifso equipped acc cccseeeseigoetantndedavewte 3 2 DOORS aane tober god E fanaa ak mane dass 3 3 Locking with Key eai sas cinisciei eee ein ae naie sunne 3 3 Locking with inside lock knob 0008 3 4 Locking with p
19. MIIL to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Do not fill a portable fuel container ona truck bed liner rubber truck bed mat or other insulating material Static elec tricity can cause an explosion of flam mable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid ACAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap pear if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears may cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap SERVICE properly may cause the ENGINE Mal function Indicator Light MIL to illumi nate If the ENGINE light illuminates be cause the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle SERVICE The ENGINE light should turn off after a few drivi
20. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing 9 42 Technical and consumer information EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver
21. if so equipped P 4 2 Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 2 Audio system controls P 4 30 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 45 Glove box P 2 42 Climate controls P 4 14 P 4 21 P 4 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Aux jack if so equipped P 4 52 Power outlet P 2 38 Heated seat switch if so equipped P 2 35 Cup holder P 2 45 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch if so equipped P 2 36 Shift selector console if so equipped P 5 16 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 34 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 54 Power outlet P 2 38 AWD shift switch if so equipped P 5 27 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 27 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 14 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped P 2 34 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 37 32 Pedal position adjustment switch if so equipped P 3 14 33 Rear power window switch if so equipped P 2 51 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS ERG ADA j hu oS N wo D E io HHE
22. Engine coolant temperature high warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high engine coolant temperature If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine and allow it to cool If the light remains on after checking the oil and coolant stop the en gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop This light is not designed to indicate a low oil or low coolant level Check the oil level with the dipstick and check the coolant level on the reservoir See Engine oil and Checking engine coolant level in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Also see If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION e Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately Such damage is not cov ered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so Instruments and controls 2 15 e If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos sible If the engine is overheated con tinued operation of the vehicle may se riously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate ac tion required AWD warning light Er model 4wD The 4WD wa
23. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil iarity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the i
24. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWEC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use
25. e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0419 Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section WRS0137 WRS0138 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage e The retractor is designed to lock dur ing a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re tractor Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The fro
26. er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment re moval and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRSO667 Forward facing step 4 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended
27. in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal function For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section in this manual AWARNING e If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may per manently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious ve hicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label loc
28. pe th TUR i IF etd all 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 WDI0630 0 8 Illustrated table of contents 1 Battery P 8 14 2 Fuse fusible link box P 8 21 3 Transmission dipstick P 8 11 4 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 5 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 13 6 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 7 Air cleaner P 8 17 8 Drive belt location P 8 16 9 Radiator cap P 8 7 10 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 12 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 12 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name P light age 2 14 Anti lock Braking System ABS warn ing light Automatic transmis sion check warning light Automatic transmis sion park warning light EEJ model Brake warning light Charge warning light 2 15 d Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light AWD warning light EZZJ model Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light 2 17 if so equipped Seat belt warning 2 18 light and chime i 2 18 Supplemental air bag warning light SERVICE E Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system on indicator light if s
29. 1 The engine coolant temperature is not re duced 2 The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON 3 The engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light illumi nates this may indicate a malfunction Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool If after checking the oiland coolant the remains on do not continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer The malfunction indicator light MIL may also come ON If only it remains on you do not need to have your vehicle towed but have it inspected soon by a NISSAN dealer See Malfunction in dicator light MIL in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual ACAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AWARNING e Do
30. 2 15 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 17 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning lights s e 28 fk eta kG ea we 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 54 Seat belt warning light 2 18 Vehicle security system 2 25 Warning labels for SRS 1 59 Warning indicator lights and audible FOMINDENS 22s ae ee ae 2 13 Waring lights iui ea wag oe ek eG 2 13 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 9 Wheels andtires 00 8 31 Wheel tire size ee 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country 000 8 9 10 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 50 Manual windows 5 2 51 Power rear windows 2 50 Power windows 00005 2 48 Rear power windows 2 50 Rear sliding window 2 51 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Wiper blades 000 8 19 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL without Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 ACAUTION e Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label ca
31. 79 5 2 019 20 x 8 0J Overall height 2WD KC in mm 75 1 1 907 Tires 4WD KC in mm 76 6 1 946 2WD CC in mm 75 4 1 916 P265 70R18 4WD CC in mm 76 9 1 954 Front Track P275 70R18 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 P275 60R20 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Rear Track Spare tire Full size 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Wheelbase Short wheel base in mm 139 8 3 550 Long wheel base in mm 159 5 4 050 Gross vehicle weight rating Ib kg See the F M V S g S C M V S S cer Gross axle weight rating tification label on the center pillar Front Ib kg between the ative Rear Ib kg er s side front and rear doors Technical and consumer information 9 9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to
32. ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 LRS0670 Rear facing step 4 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRSO762 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat
33. H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating DOT XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX t t 2 3 XXX t t t XXX XXXX 4 5 6 WDI0396 Example TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 4 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that h
34. Language setting 00 4 10 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTE a Aa a a a ae a ny Se D a eg 1 26 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Light Air bag warning light 1 60 2 18 Brake light See stop light 8 28 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement 8 28 Charge warning light 2 15 Fog light switch 00 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights s sa or aanne aie aai 8 26 Interior light 224 2 e008 a a i 2 54 Light DUDS asad work de ee eS 8 26 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning lights fee dh pea ee Ya ae ee eS 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 54 Personal lighis sa oe e ra E aa 2 55 Security indicator light 2 20 Warning indicator lights and audible FOMINdSlS a o ew a a ee 2 13 Lights MaprlightS 2 24 5 2 aecwa de don ald 2 56 Lock Child safety rear doorlock 3 7 Door locks a 2 3 each ada ea daniga 3 3 Glove Box lok i a a pi iad wy eo 2 42 Power door locks 5 3 4 Loose fuel cap warning 2 24 3 12 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 17 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning light 2 24 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 13 10 4 Maintenance Changing the maintenance inte
35. See supplemental restraint system 1 52 Front seats i 3 255 case a ede nega es 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 000 9 2 Fueleconomy 2 00 5 22 Fuel GAUGE i ticipate eR a eo 2 7 Fuel octane rating 00 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Fuel filler doorandcap 3 12 Loose fuel cap warning 2 24 3 12 Fuel economy setting 4 4 4 FUSES cde Rae RRR ER a i 8 21 Fusible links 2 2 0 2 0000008 8 23 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 so bee aS 2 56 Gas Cap a ice gila a Sos aldo en a a ees 3 12 Gauge Automatic transmission fluid temperature GAUGE ais he oa oe ee ee as ey 2 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 7 Fuel gatige s ents eee dee eaa es 2 7 Odometer sa ie e ec E Ee Ra eae a 2 5 Speedometer oua 2 5 Tachometer s socs s eee eae od 2 6 Trip d meter se aeara e a 2 5 Voltmeter o e maare ee 2 8 General maintenance 8 2 Glove BOX ese te iea ee 2 42 Glove boxlock ee e a a a a 2 42 Grocery hooks sa e de g a a g i 2 47 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 4 66 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights sans markos wa ey ed 8 26 Headphones See NISSAN mobile entertainment E A E ek E E E E 2 4 59 Heated seats 0 0 2 ee
36. Setting up the start up screen How to use the TRIP button 05 How to use the SETTING button MHD button 0 e cece cece eee eens VG MiSs d case eG a aces reise seeele and cae date wd pads Heater and air conditioner manual Type A if so equipped sier 0 eee eect eee CONTOS esesta sdhnerseanwariehneewwaee sean s Heater operation isc essei scrion asadied ras Air conditioner operation 0 cee eee Ait TloW Chants sinioro surina ta Heater and air conditioner manual Type B if so equipped 6 eee cece eee eet eee ees Controls riae a E EE Heater operation s ssiescisirrrssessesoressses Air conditioner operation 00 e eee ae Airflow chants 27 00 oee2 enews den Bob Ree takin Heater and air conditioner automatic if so equipped isc cvcucieeseratineeteceddecd cto Automatic operation 0 00 cece eee eee Manual operation 0 0c cece eee eee eee Operating tipser essre stamens havea n bate gas eee Servicing air conditioner 00 0005 Audio Syste sarsa wastes vane eee tated aed eat RAO sie cctiedee nerin nad waa ep ena ip Sine alae FM radio reCeption sires sce ee eee wee ae enanas AM radio reception 0 c cece Satellite radio reception if so equipped Audio operation precautions 000 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 6 6 cece cece eee eee FM
37. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Appearance and care 7 5 Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as po
38. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary Contact a NISSAN dealer Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option 9 3 Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel recommendation if so equipped 505 9 4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendat
39. To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward the close position To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up push the tilt switch to ward the up position To tilt the moonroof down push the tilt switch toward the down position Restarting the moonroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected the electri cal supply interrupted and or some abnormality detected Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal 1 If the moonroof lid is open push the tilting switch repeatedly toward the down position to fully close the lid 2 Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the down position to reestablish the lid s home position The moonroof should now operate normally Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moon
40. Track number Track title Once the display mode is selected press the AUDIO knob again to store the setting If the AUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds the display will refresh with the last selected display mode setting Disc number mode displays the current disc number playing in the changer Folder number mode displays the selected folder number and the track number that is currently being played Disc title mode displays the title of the CD being played Track number mode displays the number selected disc and the track that is currently being played on the disk Track title mode displays the title of the se lected CD track MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to an MP3 WMA CD with MP3 WMA text when CD with text is being used press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows Type A B C and D Track title Artist title Folder title Type E Track title Folder title Artist title gt Disc number Folder number To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display then rotate the knob to select the following display modes Type A B and E Disc number Folder number Type C and D Disc number Folder number Track title Artist title Folder title Once a display mode is selected press the AU DIO kn
41. Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position 4 24 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air con ditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting For additional information on heating and cooling see Heater and air con ditioner in this section The air recirculation gt button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Air passed through heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control
42. Type A 2 54 Instruments and controls Type B LICO630 INTERIOR LIGHT The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the interior lights illuminate regardless of door posi tion The lights will go off after about 15 minutes unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position When the switch is in the DOOR or normal operation position the interior lights puddle lights if so equipped and cargo light will stay on for about 30 seconds when The doors are unlocked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position The driver s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated when The driver s door is locked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch The ignition switch is turned ON When the switch is in the OFF position the interior lights do not illuminate regardless of door position The puddle lights if so equipped and cargo light come on when any front or rear pas senger door is opened The lights will turn off automatically after 15 min utes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged NOT
43. before locking the doors The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs contact a NISSAN dealer The keyfob will not function when the battery is discharged the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft 10 m The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch ACAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the keyfob Do not allow the keyfob which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the keyfob 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object e Do not change or modify the keyfob e Wetting may damage the keyfob If the keyfob gets wet immediately wipe until it is completely dry e Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the keyfob with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the keyfob near equip ment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and per sonal computers If a keyfob is lost or stolen NISSAN rec ommends erasing the ID code of t
44. damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire ACAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst e Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollo
45. der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0642 TWO POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITHOUT RETRACTOR center of the front bench seat if so equipped 1 19 LRS0643 LRS0644 LRS0645 Fastening the seat belts Tighten the belt by pulling the free end ofthe Position the lap belt low and snug on the belt away from the tongue hips as illustrated Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0646 LRS0647 Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at a right angle to the belt then pull on the belt Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger se
46. e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system compo
47. illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag or preten sioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover supplemental air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supple mental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replace ment of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only b
48. one drive mode to the other AWD shift indicator 3zy model While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator will illuminate the position selected by the AWD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other Automatic transmission position indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator shows the shift selector position See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual Loose fuel cap warning This warning appears when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled See Fuel filler cap in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Check tire pressure warning This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected If this warning appears stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Low tire pressure warning light earlier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section SECURITY SYSTEMS if so equipped LICO644 Your vehicle may have two types of security sys tems Vehicle security system if so equipped NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System if so equipped VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM if so equipped The ve
49. passenger car The vehicle is not de signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could re sult in loss of control and or a rollover accident Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully Be sure to check the brakes immedi ately after driving in mud or water See Brake system later in this section for Wet brakes Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward backward or sideways you could be injured Whenever you drive off road through sand mud or water as deep as the wheel hub more frequent maintenance may be required See Periodic mainte nance in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING e Never remove the ignition key or place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving The steering wheel will lock for models without NISSAN ve hicle immobilizer system This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious ve hicle damage or personal injury Starting and driving 5 9 OFF WsbD0041 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key cannot be rem
50. swing down the sub sun visor if so equipped Slide the extension sun visor if so equipped in or out as needed ACAUTION e Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position e Do not pull the extension sun visor forc edly downward Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 MIRRORS WPD0168 Type A VANITY MIRRORS if so equipped To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover if so equipped Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments Type B LPD0257 WPD0126 REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position when driving in daylight hours AWARNING Use the night position only when neces sary because it reduces rear view clarity AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass c
51. the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage Ea Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag 2 18 Instruments and controls and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the seat belts with pretensioner system may not function properly For additional details see Supplemen tal restraint system in the Safety Se
52. water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care ACAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotied e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots
53. 55 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 000 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Corrosion protection 00 7 5 Cruise control 2 ee ee 5 20 Cup holders 24 5 cde a 66 eben 84 2 45 Curtain side impact and rollover airbag 10 2 D Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC Mise cera ae ese eae aces Ag ete ae 2 28 Digital video disc DVD 4 56 Dimensions and weights 9 9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 32 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 2 Distance toempty 0004 4 5 Dog lOCKS oe eS awe ata p aii ea a 3 3 Drive belts i acg gane p i e eee a 8 16 Drive positioner Automatic a 3 24 Driving Cold weather driving 5 37 Driving with automatic transmission 5 13 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E Economy fuel sea a eru e as ee ee Rd 5 22 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock SYSLSM ai tenint goir na ek Be Ph ee ee ee Sse 5 29 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch 2 2 ee ee ee 2 36 Emission control information label 9 11 Emission control system warranty 9 40 Engine Before starting the engine 5 11 Block heater oo css sasista esasi 5 38 Capacities and rec
54. A A recirculation Button control control control recirculation Button control control control utton HOT HI OFF 23 HOT HI OFF OFF G7 S g OFF RIGHT RIGHT WHAO0916 WHAO0917 Type A Type A 4 18 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems HEATING Giedre HEATING amp aoo DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature button control dial button control dial Lew m 2 ex m 2 o Wh y o Ww l pA Air conditioner button Air flow Air conditioner button Air flow controls controls Air Air A C Air flow Temp Fan A C Air flow Tem Fan A Button control control control recirculation Button control control control reereuiaiior H HOT HI Pe HOT HI OFF p RIGHT RIGHT OFF orF g ig eim OFF WHA0918 WHA0919 Type A Type A Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 19 COOLING Air not passed through heater core Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature button control dial Air conditioner button Air flow controls A C Airflow Temp Fan recire tation Button control control control button Auto MAX COOL HI Auto turns tu
55. An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a mal function in the RSS Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob if so equipped ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For d
56. For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual In case of emergency 6 11 ACE1019 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN 6 12 In case of emergency Two wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving rear wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION e Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels e When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion This may cause damage to the lock mechanism if so equipped If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission WCE0161 KIA Xx OSA SSS Rey Rees
57. Gasoline Only This section only cov ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel vehicles ACAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door la bel can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel etha nol and 15 unleaded gasoline AWARNING e Ethanol vapors are extremely flam mable and could cause serious per sonal injury e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler cap or filling the tank e Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane num ber 91 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For the best starting and vehicle driveability re sults do not continually switch between E 85 and unleaded regular gasoline If you must switch fuels NISSAN recommends the following donot switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full add more than 5 gallons of fuel operate the vehicle immediately after refuel ing for a period of at least 5 minutes NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard start ing and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are fol
58. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Genuine NISSAN Matic J AFT will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 3 DEXRON VI type ATF may also be used 4 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer 5 For further details see Air conditioner specification label in this section 6 Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability and may damage the transfer which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 7 For further details see Changing engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 8 For hot climates Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0 C 32 F 9 See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 ACAUTION e Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85
59. Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS N wo D a K a ee h S Can _ se ZA ANE ADA hu NZ l 4 i D 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 WDI0630 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself 1 Battery 2 Fuse fusible link box 3 Transmission dipstick 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Brake fluid reservoir 6 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 7 Air cleaner 8 Drive belt location 9 Radiator cap 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Engine oil dipstick 12 Engine coolant reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre diluted mixture of 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue and 50 water to provide year round anti freeze and coolant p
60. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary e Never use blocks on or under the jack e Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials e Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack e Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground In case of emergency 6 5 WCE0152 LCE0087 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack up points are indicated by stamped ar rows on the side of the frame 6 6 In case of emergency The jack should be used on firm and level ground 3 4 Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire WCE0063 Insta
61. OFF position and then turned to the P4 or 2 position A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the 2 gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the 2 position for full illumination when driving at night 2 32 Instruments and controls If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others AON J PUSH TRIP WIC1506 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the Dd 22 or AUTO position with auto lights activated Turn the contr
62. Saye gasan e mana chal ee kde 8 39 Spark Plugs tene ea disease iar adres attired 8 17 Changing wheels and tires 00 8 39 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automo
63. Technical and consumer information 9 43 MEMO 9 44 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 4WD warning light 00 2 16 A Active brake limited slip ABLS system if so equipped 2 00 5 33 Adjusting pedal position 3 14 Air bag See supplemental restraint System s naeg a Seal a hog aa Hl le 1 45 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbagsystem 1 52 Air bag warning labels 1 59 Air bag warning light 1 60 2 18 Air cleaner housing filter 8 17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation 4 16 4 24 Air conditioner service 4 30 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9 7 Heater and air conditioner CONOS 2 Grek dices Bad 4 14 4 21 4 28 Servicing air conditioner 4 30 Airflow charts 005 4 17 4 25 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 25 Anchor point locations 1 28 Antennas i235 ek ee Rae eS 4 56 Anti lock brake warning light 2 13 2 14 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 32 Audible reminders 2 20 Audiosystem e see e ee eea e Gas 4 30 Compact Disc CD changer 4 50 Compact disc CD player a 4 39 FM AM radio with compact disc CD players s 24 348 eh ewes ad 4 37 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer ee e
64. Universal Transceiver e Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage do
65. Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave chil
66. Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo men The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child c
67. a ladder and another per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step Instruments and controls 2 57 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1
68. added while the ignition switch is in the OFF position is small the display just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may continue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display MAINTENANCE 12 31 e Tire Rotation Ea LHA0554 ENGINE OIL 8 33 Driving Distance Reset D miles 3750 Maintenance Schedule lt 4 gt Display Maintenance Notification a LHA0555 Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following e Engine Oil Tire Rotation Tire Pressure if so equipped For setting the Tire Pressure display refer to Tire pressure information later in this section Changing the maintenance interval Select the Engine Oil or Tire Rotation key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval Select the Maintenance Schedule key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 5 TIRE ROTATION 8 33 TEX Sy Driving Distance 74 D miles 3750 7 500 Maintenance Schedule lt 4 gt Display Maintenance Notification
69. anchor point P 1 28 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details LII0146 0 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT 1 Engine hood P 3 11 2 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 27 3 Windshield P 8 19 4 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 52 5 Power windows P 2 48 6 Door locks keyfob keys P 3 3 3 7 3 2 7 Mirrors P 3 16 8 Tire pressure P 9 12 9 Flat tire P 6 2 10 Tire chains P 8 39 11 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 12 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 29 13 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 33 14 Tow hooks if so equipped P 6 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details WII0116 Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR gt LI10027 0 4 Illustrated table of contents 1 Rear sliding window if so equipped P 2 51 2 Vehicle loading P 9 13 3 Tailgate Truckbox P 3 22 4 Trailer hitch Towing if so equipped P 9 24 5 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 6 Bedside storage compartment if so equipped P 2 48 7 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 12 P 9 3 9 4 8 Fuel filler door P 3 12 9 Child safety rear door lock Crew Cab models only P 3 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMEN
70. and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pressure sensor It is in the bottom of the right front passenger seat cushion and is de signed to detect an occupant and objects on the right front seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described later For example if a child is in the right front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor operation can vary depend ing on the right front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension
71. and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one use
72. and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Mi crosoft Corporation of the USA Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 33 FJ FOLDER O MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order 4 34 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Specification chart Supported le systems MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 MP3 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR versions 1 WMA WMA7 WMA8 WMAQ Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz 48 kops 102 Kops VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 MP3 only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Max folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 Di playable character codes 2 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 6
73. and trailer are clear from the blocks Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to main tain adequate control reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend ing a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak ing and reduces the need to brake as fre quently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be
74. any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the PRESET A B C select button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 49 Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD changer operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the LOAD or button then press one of the CD insert slots 1 6 Insert the compact
75. at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself ACAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A WARNING e Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability e Clean the filler cap before removing Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LDI0374 w it 6 WDI0405 BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on
76. be moved to N Neutral However for models without the NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged a a LSD0101 Column shift To push the shift lock release complete the fol owing procedure 1 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Apply the parking brake 3 On vehicles equipped with a column shifter tilt the steering wheel down to the lowest position 4 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 5 Use a protective cloth on the end of a small screwdriver before inserting it in the shift lock release slot and pushing down 6 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 7 For models without the NISSAN vehicle im mobilizer system turn the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel 8 Now the vehicle may be moved to the de sired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the auto matic transmission system as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D positi
77. before the reset are in the range of 00 29 the hour displayed before the reset will stay the same and the minutes will be reset to 00 Ifthe displayed minutes before the reset are in the range of 30 59 the hour displayed before the reset will advance by one hour and the minutes will be reset to 00 For example if the MENU button and the TUNE SEEK button are pressed while the time displayed is between 8 00 and 8 29 the display will be reset to 8 00 If the buttons were pressed while the time was between 8 30 and 8 59 the display will be reset to 9 00 At the same time the display will return to the audio FM AM radio operation FM AM button Press the FM AM button to change from AM gt FM reception The FM stereo indicator ST illuminates during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception aa Manual tuning gt gt TUNE buttons Press the TUNE 44 or PP button for less than 0 5 seconds for manual tuning To move quickly through the channels press and hold either TUNE 44 or gt gt for more than 1 5 seconds PI SEEK buttons SEEK tuning button down Press the SEEK M or PI button to seek through the frequencies Seek tuning begins from low to high frequencies or high to low frequencies depending on which button is pressed and stops at the next broadcasting sta tion Once the h
78. below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place AWARNING e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident e If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 FUEL FILLER DOOR LPD0263 FUEL FILLER CAP AWARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments e Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the ENGINE malfunction indicator light
79. belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions WRS0799 Forward facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0800 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when th
80. belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRSO761 Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRS0669 Rear facing step 3 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor
81. correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval 9 6 Technical and consumer information Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NIS
82. could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres sure warning system e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the s
83. cree eee es 5 22 FEE WaY catalysts css alias inicewen s auihal ess tant mnene 5 2 On pavement and off road driving E ce cas atianshdetea 5 28 PICCAUTIONS s enen ee ea caked tea EEn thew Rate 5 3 an Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 EI Transfer ses shining procedures a S Avoiding collision and rollover 0005 5 6 section locking rear differential E Lock system Off road reCOVely iasan doegi ete e eect eeeed kinins 5 6 if so equipped 1 eee ieee eet e enter ents 5 29 Rapid air pressure loss 0200e0eeeeeeeee 5 6 Parking parking on hills 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 30 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 5 7 Power St GrinG ss sc isin ates eiebvie ES EE Eai 5 31 Driving safety precautions eeeeee ee 5 7 Brak system cies diendstuvated sess dudeameenlidaes 5 31 Ignition SWICK sieca sonnes ar nenian wea lene ERE 5 9 Brake preCautions ini sc eceaceieta odeme banter weale 5 31 Automatic transmission s 000 0 c cece eee 5 10 Anti lock Braking System ABS 0 0005 5 32 Key positions epee eee 5 11 Active brake limited slip ABLS system 5 33 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 34 if so equipped ae ag 2 ieee chee ah A eee Oi orl Rear sonar system if so equipped 5 5 36 Before starting the engine 00 e eee eee 5 11 Cold weather driving uou asuisin ieron eri
84. de tected on the seat belt the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint t
85. did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www saferca
86. disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the POWER VOLUME or PWR VOL control knob will start the compact disc LOAD button Type A B C and D only To insert a CD in the CD changer press the LOAD button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing a CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the LOAD button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer LOAD button Type E only To insert a CD in the CD changer press the button for less than 1 5 seconds Se lect the loading slot by pressing a CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press and hold the button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer 4 50 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems CD button Type B C and E only When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is press
87. do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0748 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors LRS0395 LATCH lower anchor point locations LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two an
88. drivetrain components Speeds over 62 MPH 100 km h in 4H is not recommended e The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction Avoid raising ve hicle speed excessively as the maxi mum speed is approximately 31 MPH 50 km h e When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing e Do not shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 2WD and 4H while driving on steep downhill grades Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears D1 or D2 for engine braking Do not operate the 4WD shift switch between 2WD and 4H with the rear wheels spinning e Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD position under these conditions e The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am bient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO When driving on rough roads Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions When the vehicle is stuck Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential E Lock system if so equipped Tur
89. eani gaya drains 6 8 PUSH SPAIN Gs tects sete ena beasts danas are alsa 6 10 If your vehicle overheats 00 Towing your vehicle 00000005 Towing recommended by NISSAN Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the sys tem also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section 6 2 Incase of emergency AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while
90. earlier in this manual ACAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 18 Ibs 8 kg to a single grocery hook Instruments and controls 2 47 ual LICO625 LOCKABLE BEDSIDE STORAGE COMPARTMENT if so equipped To access the bedside storage compartment hold the key hole cover open and insert the master key Turn the key clockwise to unlock the lid The tray inside the bedside storage compartment is adjustable The bedside storage compartment will automati cally lock when the lid is closed You do not need to use the key 2 48 Instruments and controls A CAUTION e Donotsiore a total load of more than 22 Ibs 10 kg inside the storage compartment e Do not use the storage compartment or storage compartment lid as a step Do ing so may damage them WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS if so equipped AWARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passen
91. finished entering numbers choose Store The system confirms the name location and number then announces that the entry has been stored The system then ends the VR session Delete Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book all entries from the phone book the current redial number or the current call back number To delete entries from the phone book say a name or All entries when prompted by the sys tem The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion To delete the current redial number or call back number say redial number or call back num ber when prompted by the system If a redial number or a call back number exists the system deletes them without asking for confirma tion If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete the system says so and ends the VR session List names Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the Me button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Memo pad Main Menu Memo Pad Record Play Delete The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos ea
92. for infants and small children See Child re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child restraints section for more infor mation NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
93. front and rear floor outlets Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 21 Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets 3 Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets Air flows mainly from defroster outlets The air flow control dial also has intermediate positions which allow the air flow to be distrib uted between 2 of the icon positions on the air flow control dial Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the temperature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right cD Air recirculation button ON position Push the CS button to recirculate air inside the vehicle Push the gt button to the on position when driving on a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment for maximum cooling when using the air con ditioner The air recirculation mode is only functional when the air flow control mode is in the following positions H orch OFF position Push the gt button again to turn air recircula tion off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the se lected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired posit
94. items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detec
95. lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level WDI0224 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case WDI0529 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM WDI0566 A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely e Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 The current sen
96. light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC light will illuminate when the electronic locking rear differential E lock system switch if so equipped is turned on and the E lock system is engaged If the E lock system disengages or the switch is turned off the VDC system will be enabled and the VDC light will turn off AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY if so equipped WIC1248 aSo aDDo INFO WIC1249 T
97. obstacles within 5 9 ft 1 8 m of the rear bumper a beeping tone is emitted The rear sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate Push the switch again to enable the system The indicator light will go off The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 37 TOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE LICO594 Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage How ever fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 2 38 Instruments and controls For additional information refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec tion later in this manual POWER OUTLET OEEO U AIK Front row WIC1404 WIC0643 2nd row if so equipped
98. of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury e The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire Do not rapidly apply the brakes Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to driv
99. on the driver s side of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system e Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system e Modifying or tampering with the front Passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mat
100. oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 e If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol me thyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of ap propriate cosolvents and corrosion in hibitors If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or ve hicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Technical and consumer information 9 3 Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in
101. period To prevent the battery from being dis charged keep the power supply turned off when not in use NOTE For optimum infrared headphone perfor mance increase the volume on the rear seat controller to the maximum level and adjust the infrared headphone volume us ing the volume control on the headphones Using a lower volume setting on the rear seat controller can cause static noise in the infrared headphones Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 59 PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD ACAUTION e Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction The driver must not attempt to wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation While playing video CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all video CD formats With the DVD player you can hear DVD videos video CDs and CDs using headphones Passen gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde pendently of the front seat Press the CD DVD button located on the front controls to hear the sound of the DVD play through the speakers Press the REAR ON OFF button located on the front controls to disable or enable rear s
102. prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Technical and consumer information 9 37 Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This com bination will help stabilize the vehicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes 2 When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area 3 Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes e Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency 9 38 Technical and consumer information Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually e NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while tow
103. prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e mail at For U S customers nnaconsumeraffairs nissan usa com For Canadian customers information centre nissancanada com We a
104. reverse the process Make sure to prop erly push the seat cushion down into place AWARNING When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Never ride in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place and latched e When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured Passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0920 Folding the rear bench seatback down The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor point locations To tilt the seatback forward pull the strap up and tilt the seatback The child restraint anchor points can be accessed behind the rear bench seatback AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudde
105. ruins eanne EE ENE 2 48 Power windows if so equipped seses 2 48 Manual windows if so equipped 4 2 51 Rear sliding window if so equipped 2 51 Rear power window switch if so equipped 2 51 Moonroof if so equipped 0 cece eee eee 2 52 Automatic moonroof 00 c cece eee eee 2 52 Interior hight sis lt edscagarscnalaees Wards aie wiealeGie palin aunts 2 54 Console light if so equipped 0 0ee 2 55 Personal lights if so equipped 00e eee 2 55 Map lights if so equipped eee e eee eee 2 56 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 56 Programming HomeLink 0 0c eee 2 57 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUSTOMGTS is cuice hon taninos sri p agile wanna asia 2 58 Operating the HomeLink universal WANSCOING sisted srs sae cued eee es 2 58 Programming trouble diagnosis 005 2 58 Clearing the programmed information 2 58 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 59 If your vehicle is stolen 0 0 c cece eee eee 2 59 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 234 5 67 89 1 10 1112 1 13 14 1 ws i 31 29 28 2625 18 22 20 18 17 15 3332 30 27 24 23 21 19 16 WIC1563
106. seat and fold the seatback forward as far as it will go 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e If you fold the front passenger s seat back flat forward to carry longer ob jects be sure this cargo is properly se cured and not near an air bag In a crash an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even death Se cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate See Precautions on supplemental restraint system later in this section t e When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are LRS0398 LRS0399 completely secured in the latched posi Folding the rear bench seat Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward tion If they are not completely secured the back of the vehicle until it locks in place passengers may be injured in an acci To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capac dent or sudden stop ity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking tools from the storage area Lift up on the lever located on the side of the seat while lifting the front of the seat cushion up Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 LRS0400 Repeat this process to raise and secure the seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle for maximum storage capacity To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi tion
107. seating position is equipped with a head restraint Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint 1 2 3 4 Head restraint Adjustment notches Lock knob Stalks Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 4 i v LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890 To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seating position LRS0891 SPA1025 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 4 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down 3 Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position Front se
108. so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on 2 34 Instruments and controls The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving CARGO LAMP SWITCH if so equipped CARGO LAMP LICO616 To turn on the cargo lamp push the switch down to the ON position The tailgate lights if so equipped will also illuminate when the cargo amp switch is in the ON position A CAUTION Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time otherwise the battery will go dead HORN HEATED SEAT if so equipped ct mms ami LIC0604 J 4 a XW WIC1441 To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel AWARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury The front seats are warmed by built in heaters 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning
109. so the nubs on the bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the channel detents Tighten the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided wrench LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle s warranty Technical and consumer information 9 21 TRUCK CAMPER LOADING INFORMATION CREW CAB MODELS Crew Cab short wheel base models should not be used to carry a slide in camper KING CAB MODELS This information is provided for you to properly instal
110. stop or park the vehicle over ewe picts fa unenended flammable materials such as dry grass e Do not leave children unattended inside waste paper or rags They may ignite the vehicle They could unknowingly ac and cause a fire tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri e Safe parking procedures require that lis accidents both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail 1 Firmly apply the parking brake ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi sult in an accident Make sure the shift tion selector has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved with out depressing the foot brake pedal 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated 5 30 Starting and driving HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion POWER STEER
111. tea neice bene 2 4 Speedometer and odometer 00 00e ee 2 5 TaChOMeCte E E renee vate ote ee we dares 2 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Ln U iF 0 ene aae nea nee ee 2 7 Engine oil pressure gauge if so equipped 2 7 Voltmeter if so equipped 06 cee eee eee 2 8 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge if so equipped 06 e cece eee eee eee 2 8 Compass display if so equipped 0 eee 2 9 Compass display 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 10 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 13 Checking bulbs 0 00 eee eee eee aes 2 13 Warning lights 22 0c2cccacrstsseoreieenere tons 2 13 Indicator ligt ei iis decswdee ce iagnennsedieds nates 2 18 Audible reminders 0 00 000e cence enna 2 20 Vehicle Information Display if so equipped 2 21 How to use the Vehicle Information Display 2 21 Security systems if so equipped 0e ee 2 25 Vehicle security system if so equipped 2 25 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system fso equipped ci cccundiwevensy ner crew eree see 2 26 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 SWiCh Operation ises iveror esn ei orsews enna 2 27 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster SWITCH er coc coast don wide ni ipro iinan i 2 28 Headlight and turn signal switch 008 2 29 Headlight control switch cece 2 29 Day
112. terminals as it could cause a malfunction When changing the battery do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat tery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Recommended battery CR2025 or equivalent Close the lid securely 5 Press the button then the ti button two or three times to check the key fob operation If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement perform step 5 e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal e The keyfob is water resistant how ever if it does get wet immediately wipe completely dry e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle This range may vary with conditions Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the hal
113. the ignition switch in the OFF position e The lockable bedside storage com partment if so equipped is not pro tected by the vehicle security system Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the key or by pressing the button on the keyfob The alarm is activated by opening a door without using the key or keyfob even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door with the key or by pressing the A button on the keyfob NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait
114. the crash zone sensor the Air Bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors occupant clas sification sensor pressure sensor and right front passenger seat belt tension sensor Inflator op eration is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the right front passenger it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Addition ally the right front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight detected on the pas senger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the beginning of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise
115. the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the button to turn on the air conditioner The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner push the 4 button again The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets 1 Press the CS button to the OFF position for normal heating The indicator light on the CS button will go off 2 Press the i air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired position 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Press the VS button to the OFF position The indicator light on the gt button will go off 2 Press the 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired position air flow control button 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 15 Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows 1 Turn the air flow control dial to the HY position 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired position 3 Turn the temperature cont
116. the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground LT10131 Bumper towing The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the center of the step bumper then remove it to install the trailer hitch ball Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load leveling or equalizing hitch A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight hitch weight of your trailer Many ve hicles can t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels This gives stability to the tow vehicle A weight distributing hitch s
117. the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity Overloading your ve hicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable handling character istics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading be yond the specified capac
118. turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets MAX A C Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling air conditioning Air flows from center and side vents ipd Air flows from center and side vents and the front and rear floor outlets Kad Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets 3 Air flows from defroster out lets and the front and rear floor outlets Temperature control dial e The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the temperature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right Ar recirculation button ON position Push the gt button to recirculate air inside the vehicle Push the gt button to the on position when driving on a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment for maximum cooling when using the air con ditioner The air recirculation mode is only functional when the air flow control mode is in the following positions H or i OFF position Push the button again to turn air recircula tion off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the se lected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button Start
119. underside of the hood as shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE aS WTI0100 ae c a a WT10220 LT10093 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The label is located as shown 9 12 Technical and consumer information AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown Use the following steps to mount the front license plate 1 Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark small dimple using a 0 20 in 5 mm drill Apply light pressure to the drill Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder 2 Mount the license plate using two M6 14mm bolts License plate bolt tightening torque 3 8 4 7 ft lb 5 10 6 37 N m VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight
120. ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground e If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Rear Sonar System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R Reverse The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The RSS detects obstacles up to 5 9 feet 1 8 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a station ary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the sys tem detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is ON The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be ON and the shift selector in R Reverse
121. ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to Identify the tire in case of a recall 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself P215 65R15 95H Example Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 1 P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information 2 Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge 3 Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 5 6 15 t WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law
122. wheel off set dimensions e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Eszy Four wheel drive models ACAUTION Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam age the transmission transfer case and differential gears Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 If excessive tire wear is found it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size brand construction and tread pattern
123. will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The Seif light should turn off after a few driving trips If the 847 light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Instruments and controls 2 19 ACAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light if so equipped This light blinks whe
124. you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is not a cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A CAUTION e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped Your vehicle is designed to use E 85 Fuel Etha nol Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined U S government regulations require Fuel Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region ACAUTION Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage or a loss of vehicle performance General information This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles FFV only FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded
125. your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts lt is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off ACAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid e Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position This
126. your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you 9 4 Technical and consumer information detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then
127. 0 Ib 9 100 Ib Capacity 1 2 3 4 309 kg 4 263 kg 4 173 kg 4 263 kg 4 218 kg 4 218 kg 4 218 kg 4 127 kg 431 kg 426 kg 417 kg 426 kg 422 kg 422 kg 422 kg 413 kg 646 kg 639 kg 626 kg 639 kg 633 kg 633 kg 633 kg 619 kg 15 100 lb 15 100 lb 15 100 lb 15 100 lb 15 100 lb 15 100 lb Weight Rating 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg 6 848 kg Towing load specification chart with tow package long wheel base a T SE SV Maximum Towing 9 300 Ib 4 218 kg 9 100 Ib 4 127 kg Capacity 1 2 3 Maximum Tongue load 2 3 930 Ib 422 kg 910 Ib 413 kg Maximum King pin load 1 395 Ib 633 kg 1 365 Ib 619 kg Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15 100 lb 6 848 kg 15 100 lb 6 848 kg 9 28 Technical and consumer information Towing load specification chart without tow package short wheel base 2WD 4WD Maximum Towing 7 400 Ib 7 400 Ib 7 400 b 7 400 b 7 100 b 7 400 b 7 400 Ib 7 300 Ib 7 300 Ib 7 000 Ib capacity 1 2 3 3 356 kg 3 356 kg 3 356 kg 3 356kg 3 220kg 3 356kg 3 356kg 3 111kg 8 111kg 3 175 kg 9 3 336 kg 336 kg 336 kg 336 kg 322 kg 336 kg 336 kg 311 kg 311 kg 318 kg 504 kg 504 kg 504 kg 504 kg 483 kg 504 kg 504 kg 496 kg 496 kg 476 kg Maximum Gross Com 12 800 lb 12 800 lb 12 800 lb 12 800 lb 12 800 Ib 13 000 lb 13 000 b
128. 0 Ib x 5 150 Ib 500 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14kg 70 kg 227 kg LT10152 Example Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of weights later in this section Also check tires for proper infla
129. 0036 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 26 Technical and consumer information Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue king pin load use the following proce dure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that a
130. 1 4 Say New phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel lular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed 5 The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again 6 The system asks you to assign a priority level The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more information on changing priorities 7 The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone Follow the instruc tions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more infor mation on selecting ringtones Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call Number s
131. 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position 4 16 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Whenthe position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the A C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off the fan is turned off or the A C button is used to turn off the compres sor even if the air flow control dial is turned ts D ae to a position other than the position This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The amp gt mode automati cally turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and pushin the A C button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is
132. 28 1 Two master keys black with transpon der chip if so equipped and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side 2 Valet key black with transponder chip if so equipped 3 Key number plate 4 Transponder chip if so equipped A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS if so equipped You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks The valet key cannot be used for the console box lock the bedside storage compartment lock or the glove box lock if so equipped To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the valet key only Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN
133. 4 Incase of emergency Rocking a stuck vehicle AWARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 2 Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differ ential E Lock System if so equipped 3 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 4 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 mph 55 km h or above 12 mph 20 km h if the E Lock System is engaged If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior i visciaeccreeseiwa ean ewbeapeanes 7 2 Air fresheners socs sinnccwewess ern nenan ier ened 7 4 Washing 224222 026tucrandr eis beeeded eed somes 7 2 FIOOFMats oiite iuran maneni wiena wate ad kate 7 4 WAKING acces cata cd ncceseed staan adie ded kde 7 2 Seat belts oc2rsccvnweens
134. 4 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 35 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and MP3 WMA files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc is protected by copyright P d lit Check if the disc is scratched or dirty e tae Bit rate may be too low It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing before the music starts playing The writing software and hardwa
135. 8 qt 5 3 4 qt 6 5 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 1 Without oil filter change 6 1 2 qt 5 1 2 qt 6 2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 Cooling system With reservoir 3 1 4 gal 2 5 8 gal 12 2 Pre diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid PSF Brake fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF 2 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 3 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 4 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base Air conditioning system refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a 5 Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 5 Transfer fluid 2 1 8 qt 1 3 4 qt 2 0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended 6 Front final drive oil 3 3 8 pt 2 7 8 pt 1 6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL 5 80W 90 or API GL 5 Viscosity SAE 80W 90 Gear Oil 8 Rear final drive oil 4 1 4 pt 3 1 2 pt 2 0 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W 140 or API GL 5 synthetic gear oil Viscosity SAE 75W 140 9 Windshield washer fluid shared between 1 1 4 gal 1 gal 45 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent front and rear wipers 1 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section 2
136. 992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 58 Instruments and controls 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surfac
137. AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer Type A B C D and E if so equipped 0 cece eee eee ee eee CD care and cleaning 0 00000e Steering wheel switch for audio control if so equipped 0 cece cece eee eee eee Rear audio controls if so equipped Antenna roret atr bon kasaen use ERNE EE EA EA NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES if so equipped s nkiudi tide teeeeda tae salads Digital video disc DVD player controls Remote Control wii c2sc ice tecer awd neataees ewes Flip dOWN SCION is ceses sae tee ee a ee eee Playing a digital video disc DVD 4 60 Using the system serkent ridan iaden sisipag 4 68 Care and maintenance 000 cece eee 4 63 Control buttons 0 000 c cece cece eee 4 70 How to handle the DVD 0s0ee sees 4 63 Getting started 0 0 c cece eee 4 71 Car phone or CB radio 06 ce eee eee eee eens 4 66 List of voice commands 00e cece eens 4 73 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Speaker adaptation SA mode 4 4 78 if so equipped 6 6 ee eset eee ee teeter 4 66 Troubleshooting guide 0 08 4 80 Regulatory Information cc cee eae 4 68 AWARNING e Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to the driving operation
138. AN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES if so equipped LHA0389 AWARNING e The Mobile Entertainment System is designed for rear seat passenger view ing only e The driver must not attempt to operate the Mobile Entertainment System while the vehicle is in motion so that full at tention may be given to vehicle operation ACAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water e Use a damp soft cloth when cleaning the Mobile Entertainment System com ponents Do not use solvents or clean ing solutions Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C To avoid discharging the vehicle battery do not operate the system more than 15 minutes without starting the engine 4 C D O PLAY PAUSE button MENU button DISPLAY button NAVIGATION keys 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 LHA0316 1 EJECT button DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD PLAYER 2 DVD slot CONTROLS 3 ENTER button s z E 4 POWER on off bution e msn aa 5 MODE button f 6 Input jacks 7 STOP button 8 9 1 1 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 57 LHA0317 r
139. At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 6 WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the re straint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secure
140. CO578 GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box lock if so equipped The valet key cannot be used AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop C J DT F LIC0567 SUNGLASSES HOLDER if so equipped To open the sunglasses holder push and release A WARNING e Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses LIC0589 MAP POCKETS Instruments and controls 2 43 3 LIC0575 SEATBACK POCKET if so equipped The seatback pocket is located on the back of the driver s seat The pocket can be used to store maps 2 44 Instruments and controls OVERHEAD CONSOLE if so equipped LIC0568 Small bin if so equipped EEE Medium bin if so equipped Storage bins A WARNING Keep storage bins closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop Push the button to open a storage bin Push the lid up to close LIC1372 Front Type A CUP HOLDERS ACAUTION e Avoid abrupt
141. E The footwell and door step lights if so equipped illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after about 15 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery PERSONAL LIGHTS if so equipped Swe LICO587 e LICO623 CONSOLE LIGHT if so equipped The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control The personal lights on the overhead console can be swiveled 360 degrees To turn on the light press the button Press the button again to turn off the light Instruments and controls 2 55 MAP LIGHTS if so equipped LICO586 To turn the map lights on press the switches To turn them off press the switches again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery 2 56 Instruments and controls HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink
142. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section e After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked e Donot leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased ACAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN S CHAIR SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped LRS0419 LRS0420 WRS0847 Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to
143. ING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control Starting and driving 5 31 AWARNING e While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or ac
144. IONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Push the CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out e Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out e Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13
145. LIC0618 Inside center armrest if so equipped The power outlets are for powering electrica accessories such as cellular telephones The power outlets located on the driver s side of the instrument panel and in the truck box are powered directly by the vehicle s battery The power outlets located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel inside the center armrest and in the 2nd row are powered only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet ACAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the o
146. MANUAL WINDOWS if so equipped The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door REAR SLIDING WINDOW if so equipped Squeeze the handles of the lever then slide the window open 2 REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH if so equipped To open the rear power window push in and hold the switch To close the rear power window pull out and hold the switch To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch Instruments and controls 2 51 NOTE If the rear power window if so equipped is lowered while the defroster switch is on the rear window defroster will automati cally shut off The heated outside mirrors if so equipped will remain on The rear win dow defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on 2 52 Instruments and controls MOONROOF if so equipped On UP OPEN tO ASTO SO CH DOWN CLOSE l TO WIC0812 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moon roof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch to ward the open position
147. MODE 3 Press the button For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker Adaptation SA mode later in this section 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE You must press the 44 button or the 22E button within 5 seconds to change the language Press C6 PHONE SEND to select Press MODE Coia Current language PHONE END to select English Engish Engish 5 If you decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Pairing procedure NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Setup Pair phone New phone Initiate from handset Name phone Assign priority Choose ringtone 1 Press the amp amp button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Setup The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Pair phone The system acknowl edges the command and announces the next set of available commands Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 7
148. OFF LSD0159 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake To release i 2 Firmly apply the foot brake Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out 5 20 Starting and driving oOn gt 4 ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch CANCEL switch ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL lf the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver see Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and con trols section f the SET indicator light blinks push the cruise control ON OFF switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control ON OFF switch is pushed ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To prop erly set the cruise control system use the following procedures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERAT
149. RSE Biches Seer ccs POSER LCE0083 Four wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle Pulling a stuck vehicle AWARNING To avoid vehicle damage serious per sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle e Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure In case of emergency 6 13 e Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks e Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle e Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer s instructions Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull at an angle e Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufacturer s instructions for the recovery de vice Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery 6 1
150. S HERTS 2 Ee Minutes 4 gt Auto Adjust GPS Time 06 25 Daylight Saving Time Select Time Zone l Pacific LHA0562 EA CLOCK SETTINGS 4 gt Hours ae oe en 6 25 Minutes 4 gt Auto Adjust GPS Time 06 25 sigt Seung tie Select Time Zone l Pacific LHA0566 Clock Adjusting the time Select the Hours or Minutes key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time The time will change step by step The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Setting daylight savings time Use the Daylight Saving Time key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time ON Automatically adjusts for daylight savings time OFF The current time is displayed Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 11 CLOCK SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS EH TIME ZONE Y Hours 4 gt Hours 4 gt 6 25 6 25 Mountain Minutes 4 gt Minutes 4 gt Central Auta Auct GPS Tine O35 Auto Adjust GPS Time 08 25 a astern Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time AtantiC Select Time Zone l Pacific Select ime Zone Pafe Newfoundl
151. SAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and wi
152. Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the shift selector to the down side Shifts to lower range The transmission will automatically down shift the gears For example if you select the 3rd range the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession Starting and driving 5 17 When canceling the manual shift mode Press the manual shift mode button to return the transmission to the normal driving mode Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear immediately because of vehicle speed The transmission will up or down shift when vehicle speed matches the pro grammed transmission shift points This helps maintain driving perfor mance and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion will not up shift to a higher gear than is manually selected When the vehicle speed decreases the transmis sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop 5 18 Starting and driving GH0e8 8 ti LSD0090 Console shift Shift lock release If the battery is discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed To move the shift selector release the shift lock The shift selector can
153. T a N a LII0029 OANOAR WN 9 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details DVD entertainment system if so equipped P 4 56 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 52 Map lights if so equipped P 2 56 Sun visors P 3 15 HomeLink if so equipped P 2 56 Glove box P 2 42 Cup holders P 2 45 Front seats P 1 2 Folding rear bench seat P 1 11 Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 234 5 67 89 1 10 1112 1 13 14 1 ws i 31 29 28 2625 18 22 20 18 17 15 3332 30 27 24 23 21 19 16 WIC1563 0 6 Illustrated table of contents j 11 12 13 14 15 Vents P 4 13 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 29 Steering wheel switch for audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if so equipped P 4 54 P 4 70 Instrument brightness control P 2 32 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 45 P 2 35 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 20 Shift selector column if so equipped P 5 16 Ignition switch P 5 9 Navigation system
154. TING button is pressed the SET TINGS screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 7 DISPLAY SETTINGS Brightness Contrast Display Off WHA0855 m gt Brightness Contrast WHAO716 Push DAY NIGHT button for 2 seconds to resume display LHA0642 Display settings Select the Display key and press the ENTER button The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap pear Brightness contrast Select the Brightness Contrast key to adjust the brightness and contrast of the map back ground Use the joystick to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 4 8 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Display off Select the Display Off key The indicator of the Display Off turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play
155. accident or sudden stop WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts Tounfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer ow A LRS0242 Front seats Shoulder belt height adjustment front outboard seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor 2 to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Re lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul
156. ace the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 53 1 VOL 2 3 l MODE 4 Aw Vv WHA0612 Type B Volume control switch Phone operation switch Power on and MODE select switch Tuning switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL if so equipped PONH The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on off switch If you have the Type A switch with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off If you have the Type B switch with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position push the MODE switch to turn the audio system on MODE select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence PRESET A PRE SET B PRESET C CD DVD if so equipped AUX This mode is only available when a CD is loaded This mode is only available when a DVD is loaded into the DVD player This mode is only available when a compatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack Volume control switch Push the volume control s
157. actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a lo
158. add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add windshield washer fluid when the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on if so equipped To fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield washer fluid into the reservoir opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for windshield washer fluid This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the wind
159. aded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label See Measurement of weights later in this section Technical and consumer information 9 13 Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration 9 14 Technical and consumer information Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg 70 kg Occupants Lugg age Ri CA Occupants RR 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 150 Ib x 2 300 Iib 30 Ib x 2 60 ib 135 kg 14 kg Trailer Tongue Weight ae 300 Ib 27 kg 135 kg Luggage AS 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 472 kg Occupants Luggage Load limit Remaining available 640 kg load capacity 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 3
160. affect vehicle handling This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Technical and consumer information 9 39 AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is ba
161. age could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors ACAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric
162. aling surface with a clean rag ACAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary 5 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing ACAUTION e Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora tion in driveability and automatic trans mission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 POWER STEERING FLUID V Hor MAX MAX HoT colo colo t WDI0256 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
163. all doors are locked When the button is pushed with all doors locked the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep Refer to Silencing the horn beep feature vehicles without navigation system in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section or Vehicle electronic systems vehicles with navigation system in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone sys tems section 4 Confirm that the S gt indicator light comes on The 2 light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After about 30 seconds the ve hicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The cs light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob or the ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON the system will not arm 2 26 Instruments and controls Ifthe key is turned slowly when locking the door the system may not arm Fur thermore if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key the system may be disarmed when the key is re moved If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds unlock the door once and lock it again Even when the driver and or passengers are in the vehicle the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with
164. allation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system e If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system The pretensioner system also activates with the curtain and rollover air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers Working with the seat belt retrac tor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light 2i will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds a
165. ame size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on P275 60R20 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P275 60R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install P265 70R18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensi
166. and LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563 Adjusting the time to the GPS Selecting the time zone Select one of the following zones depend Select the Auto Adjust key 1 Select the Select Time Zone key ing on the current location The time will be reset to the GPS time The TIME ZONE screen will appear e Pacific zone 4 12 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Mountain zone Central zone Eastern zone Atlantic zone Newfoundland zone After selection the CLOCK SETTINGS screen will appear The GPS time manual time corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed Pacific zone has been set as the initial default setting Beep setting With this option ON a beep will sound if any audio button is pressed Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Guidance voice settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings 12 BUTTON To change the display brightness press the 4 2 button Pressing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display Then adjust the brightness by moving the joy stick right or left If no operation is done within 10 seconds or if the BACK button is pressed the display will return to the previous display VENTS
167. any sticker or write anything on either surface of the DVD LHA0484 DVD player operation precautions Do not use the following DVDs as they may cause the DVD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter 4 64 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems DVDs with a region code other than 1 The region code is displayed in a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD DVDs that are not round DVDs with a paper label DVDs that are warped scratched or have unequal edges Recordable digital video discs DVD R Rewritable digital video discs DVD RW If a DVD with a paper label is used and becomes jammed you may be able to reset the unit and eject the jammed disc with the following procedure 1 2 Record the radio presets Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery for five minutes 3 Reconnect the negative battery terminal 4 Check to see if the jammed DVD has been ejected If it has not try to eject the DVD by pushing the eject button If the disc cannot be ejected see your NISSAN dealer for further assistance Re program the radio presets LHA0318 SAA0723 Remote control and headphones battery replacement Replace the battery as follows Open the lid 2 Replace batteries with new ones Size AA remote control Size AAA headphones Make sure that the and e
168. approximately 10 sec onds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH LICO474 LICO965 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gin
169. ar bench seat Before securing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors rear outboard seating po sitions only or the seat belt as applicable follow these steps 1 If necessary raise or remove the head re straint to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information 2 Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint 3 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the seat directly behind the child restraint 4 Return the seatback to the locked position 5 Refer to the appropriate child restraint in stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN dealer for details BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s
170. arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat should be used If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained
171. as the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES AWARNING e When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN
172. as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required LIC1199 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty The lt p indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle ACAUTION elif the vehicle runs out of fuel SERVICE the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light SOON MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer e For additional information see Mal function Indicator Light MIL later in this section LIC1198 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE if so equipped The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys tem oil pressure while the engine is running The needle should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running Instruments and con
173. ash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags as needed Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pressure sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front Passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back ARS1133 ARS1041 AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some example
174. at Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section FLEXIBLE SEATING AWARNING e Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats e Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them prop erly if they have been removed for any rea
175. ated in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light if so equipped This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear Instruments and controls 2 17 iA Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time
176. ater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 61 If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is pressed for more than 2 seconds the media track time information will be displayed along the bottom of the display Pressing the DISPLAY control for more than 2 seconds will remove the media track time information from the display Faceplate feature only NAVIGATION KEYS If media is in PLAY mode activation of the NAVI GATION KEYS Up Down Left and Right will perform the following functions next chapter track previous chapter track fast re verse and fast forward and the display will show Pl MO 44 and P gt respec tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds Faceplate feature only If media is in PAUSE mode activation of the NAVIGATION KEYS Up Down and Right will perform the following functions next chapter track previous chapter track and slow forward and the display will show gt I M and a forward arrow symbol respectively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds Faceplate feature only If media is in activated MENU mode the NAVI GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu If display control menu is on the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu ENTER In MENU mode press the ENTER button to se lect MENU items In the display menu press the ENTER button to select items for modi
177. ather condition of the selected satellite radio station Title mode displays the song title show name or temperature of the selected satel lite radio station FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Type B and C only Pressing the FM AM FM AM or SAT radio select button will change the band to either FM AM or SAT satellite if so equipped radio stations When the FM AM FM AM or SAT radio select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the POWER VOLUME control knob is pressed ON No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the FM AM FM AM or SAT radio select button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception 4 48 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems FM AM SAT band select Type A D and E only Pressing the RADIO button will change
178. atically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on Fp Type C A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster LIC1158 SIC2745 Type A HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting When turning the switch to the P4 posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on Instruments and controls 2 29 WIC1250 Type B ACAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery 2 30 Instruments and controls Dd SIC3019 Type C WIC1251 Autolight system if so equipped The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headligh
179. ating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur chasing an extender if an extender is required Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident e Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth 1 21 e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD SAFETY Child
180. ats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section DIFF Electronic locking rear LOCK differential E Lock system on indicator light if so equipped This light comes on when the electronic locking rear differential E Lock system clutch is fully engaged The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on When the system fully engages the ight remains on If the switch is on and the indicator light continues to flash the system is not engaged For additional information see Electronic lock ing rear differential E Lock system switch later in this section and Electronic locking rear differ ential E Lock system in the Starting and driv ing section of this manual Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light 2 will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the right front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status li
181. automatic transmission 5 13 Shift selector lock release 5 18 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COUNTY eo wee Gls ea aioe oo E 9 10 Tip buttoned ee ae ee e e 4 4 Trip odometer sosis ek eee ee 2 5 Truck camper loading 9 22 Turn signal switch 000 2 33 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 39 v Vanity mirror 3 16 Variable voltage control system 8 16 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 9 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 36 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 34 Vehicle electronic system 4 9 Vehicle identification 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 0006 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle loading information 9 13 Vehicle recovery 2 00 2200 05 6 13 Vehicle security system 00 2 25 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobi lizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Ventilators s eee Se Hee ere ed a a 4 13 VISOS cf Sd fy ese ap bee and Ar ae AA 3 15 Voltmeter s 2a i000 ue got ai g a d ws 2 8 Ww Warning 4WD warning light 0 2 16 Air bag warning light 1 60 2 18 Anti lock brake warning light 2 13 2 14 Battery charge warning light 2 15 Brake warning light 2 14 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light
182. ay be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg maximum weight rating but your ve hicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section 5th wheel gooseneck A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed by installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch These types of hitches are mounted in the bed of the pick up A professional trailer equipment sup plier should install these hitches as it is very important to mount the hitch correctly to distrib ute the king pin weight for the proper load carry ing and sway control performance The king pin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the fully loaded trailer Make sure the king pin weight does not cause the gross vehicle weight to exceed the Gross Maximum Weight Rating or the rear axle weight to exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating see Maximum load limits earlier in this section The weight of the trailer should not exceed the maximum towing capacity for the vehicle see Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section Make sure the trailer design allows for the correct vehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a 5th wheel trailer ACAUTION e Special hitches which include frame re inforcements are required for towing above 2 000 Ib 907 kg Suitable genu ine NISSAN hitches ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and spo
183. ay button is pressed while the compact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT All discs loaded will be repeated 1 DISC RPT The disc that is currently playing will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT The track that is currently playing will be repeated ALL DISC RDM Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM Tracks from the disc that is cur rently playing will be played randomly Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 51 REAR ON OFF if so equipped Pressing the REAR ON OFF button for less than 1 5 seconds turns the rear seat audio controller on REAR CONT ON will display Pressing it again will turn the rear seat audio controller off REAR CONT OFF will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio controller the display will show REAR AV N A oid SPEAKER CONTROL button Type A and D only Press the fl button to turn the rear speakers off and the headphones on Press the E but ton again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the headphones off 4 CD EJECT Current Selected disc e Press the amp button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected If the ejected disc is not removed w
184. b 13 000 lb 13 000 Ib 13 000 lb Towing load specification chart without tow package long wheel base Maximum Towing 7 100 Ib 3 220 kg 7 000 Ib 3 175 kg capacity 1 2 3 Maximum Tongue load 2 3 710 Ib 822 kg 700 lb 318 kg Maximum King pin load 1 065 Ib 483 kg 1 050 Ib 476 kg Maximum Gross Combined 12 800 Ib 5 806 kg 13 000 Ib 5 897 kg Weight Rating 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity 2 Use of a weight distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5 000 Ibs 3 The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5 000 Ib 2268 kg and 500 Ib 227 kg tongue load Technical and consumer information 9 29 TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package The trailer tow package in cludes a receiver type frame mounted hitch This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package c
185. be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 69 Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two zero zero en Say pound for Say star for avail able when using the Call International command and the Send command during a call Say plus for available only when using the Call International command Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number rea You can say star for and pound for at any time in any position of the phone number available only when using Call In ternational command See List of voice commands and Interna tional in this section for more information Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three NOTE For best results say phone numbers a
186. ble to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment 4 30 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PWR power VOL vol ume knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indica
187. bled pressing the MENU button will change the mode as follows BAS TRE FAD BAL CLOCK Hour adjustment Minute adjustment Audio BAS For more information on setting the clock see Clock set later in this section Clock operation Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis played use the SEEK button to turn the clock display on CLK ON or off CLK OFF Clock set If the clock is not displayed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position you need to select the CLK ON mode Press the MENU but ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed Use the SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode 1 Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLOCK mode appears press the SEEK button until CLK ON appears 2 Press the MENU button again the hours will start flashing 3 Press the SEEK button Mor PI to adjust the hour 4 Press the MENU button again the display will switch to the minute adjustment mode 5 The minutes will start flashing Press SEEK button M or Pl 6 Press the MENU button again to exit the clock set mode to adjust the minutes The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds or press the MENU button again to return to the regular clock display 4 38 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Resetting the time Hold the MENU button down and then press the TUNE SEEK button the time will reset as fol lows Ifthe displayed minutes
188. button 44 or P gt ing knob to right or left or turn the tun To move quickly through the channels press and hold either the 44 or PP button down for more than 1 5 seconds ri SEEK TRACK button Seek tuning Press the SEEK TRACK button M or Pl for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station To seek quickly through the channels press and hold the SEEK TRACK button for more than 1 5 seconds When the button is released the radio will seek to the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Type C only Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station SCAN RPT tuning Type A B and D only Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1 5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station AM FM or SAT if so equipped for 5 seconds Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN RPT button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM AM and SAT satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in
189. button 6 RADIO button 2 Display 7 AUX button 3 DISP CLOCK button 8 SCAN RPT button 4 SEEK TRACK button 9 CAT FOLDER button 5 CD button 10 CD LOAD button 11 12 13 14 15 CD insert slot CD eject button PWR VOL power volume control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons Tuning and AUDIO control knob BASS MID TREBLE FADE and BALANCE No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 45 FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER Type A B C D and E if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT or RADIO button is pressed to select satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Audio main operation POWER VOLUME control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and then push the POWER VOLUME or PWR VOL control knob while t
190. cation for center of gravity 0 008 9 22 Payload weight capacity e eee 9 23 Measurement of weights 0 eee 9 23 Hey Tare pe oc lt dee seius cunsunente unet a 9 24 Maximum load limits 0 c eee eee 9 24 Towing load specification c e eae 9 28 TOWING Safety ssr eere iaa a aa d a ro 9 30 FlattoWNng seseo roa 9 39 Show plow berare phust auet seems ni ibane ei 9 39 Uniform tire quality grading c cee eee 9 39 Emission control system warranty 00008 9 40 Reporting safety defects e ccc eee eee 9 41 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 42 Event Data Recorders EDR 0 000seeaeee 9 42 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 43 In the event of a collision 0 eae 9 43 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be a little different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 28 gal 23 1 4 gal 105 8 See Fuel Recommendation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle Option or Flexible Fuel Ve hicle FFV Fuel Recommendation later in this section Engine oil 7 Drain and Refill _ With oil filter change 6 7
191. cel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance 5 32 Starting and driving This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow cov
192. ch up to 20 seconds long 4 76 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Record A The system announces Recording and a tone sounds signaling you to begin Speak the information you wish to record clearly When you are done press the C or MORE button on the steering wheel A tone sounds and the system announces Memo recorded Another tone sounds to end the VR session If the memo pad is full the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo Play The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest The system ends the VR session If there are no memos recorded the system an nounces No messages to play The system ends the VR session Delete The Delete command erases all memos The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos Setup Main Menu Setup Pair Phone List Phone Select Phone Change Priority Delete Phone Select Ringtone Bluetooth Off Use the Setup command to change options as sociated with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Pair phone Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat ible phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancell
193. chors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint 1 27 LRS0393 Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located under the rear window behind the rear bench seat REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0801 Rear facing web mounted step 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors
194. conditioner audio and phone systems Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Press the AUTO button on 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger temperatures can be set inde pendently Press DUAL to activate dual cli mate control functions Turn the passenger s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s tem perature e Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Press the defroster control button GY to turn the system on The indicator light in the button will illuminate 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired tempera
195. ctor from neutral wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady the transfer gear may grind not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position If the 4WD warning light illuminates perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition 5 24 Starting and driving 2 3 1 Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch OFF 2 Start the engine Check that the 4WD warning light turns off If the 4WD light illuminates have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 3 Apply the parking brake depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position 4 With the brake pedal depressed move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position While changing in and out of 4LO the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights 4WD shift and 4LO position indicator to be operable Otherwise the shift will not take place and no indi Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The EE 4LO is selected See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system
196. cy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of cool ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue includ ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill cool ant Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 zZ Ne FER as SCN SI EY LDI0369 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of coolant or 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur ized tank When installing the cap tighten it until a clicking sound is
197. d by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made t
198. d engine oil out of reach of children ACAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary WDI0505 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter se
199. d prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 10 PY Forward facing step 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light A2 should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled 1 37 WRS0256 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS FRONT BENCH CENTER POSITION AWARNING Never install a rear facing child re straint in the front passenger seat Front air bags inflate with great force A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child e NISSAN recommends that child re straints be installed in the rear seat However if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front center bench seat follow these instructions carefully A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen ger seat 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system
200. d puddle lights if so equipped turn on and the light timer acti vates for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position Press the tl within 5 seconds button on the keyfob again All doors unlock The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed The interior lights can be turned off without wait ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START position locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF posi tion Auto relock Whenthe M button onthe keyfob is pressed all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per formed Any door is opened A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting See Automatic drive positioner in this section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 Using the interior lights Press the button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped D ae For additional information refer to Interior light in the Instruments and controls section in this manual Using the panic a
201. d rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 57 AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems This is to prevent dam age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems e Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and
202. de of the rim Before operating the vehicle ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds With a higher center of gravity your NISSAN is more af fected by strong side winds Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires even with 4WD engaged For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury Accelerating quickly sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control If at all possible avoid sharp turning maneuvers particularly at high speeds Your NISSAN four wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a
203. devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle If a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modification not ex pressly approved by the party respon sible for compliance could void the us er s authority to operate the equipment Starting and driving 5 5 For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence include interference that may cause undesired operation of the de vice AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle l
204. dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button A C Air flow Temp Fan Air Button control control control recirculation WHA1079 Type B Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 25 BI LEVEL HEATING Air passed through heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button A C Air flow Temp Fan Air i Button control control control feces lation 3 HOT HI OFF RIGHT RIGHT OFF WHA1080 HEATING Air passed through heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Air A C Airflow Temp oii Sit oat H HOT HI on or WHA1081 Type B 4 26 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Type B HEATING amp DEFROSTING DEFOGGIN q Air passed through heater core G Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button A C Airflow Temp Fan Air Button control control control e tan P3 HOT HI OFF SF RIGHT RIGHT OFF COOLING WHA1082 heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial cont
205. distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP ABLS SYSTEM e ABLS system uses aut
206. dow equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the power window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing the window will be immediately low ered WIC0263 LICO627 LIC1553
207. dphones off MODE button The MODE button allows the rear passengers to change between AM FM CD DVD and AUX The media options are listed on the face plate of the rear audio controls When a source of media is selected the media label will be illuminated SEEK button In AM or FM mode the SEEK button allows the rear seat passengers to find the next radio station up or down the station band frequency In CD mode the SEEK button allows the rear passengers to find the next or previous selection on the CD NEXT button When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM or FM mode the radio will change to the next preset The NEXT button does not function while in SAT radio mode or when playing a DVD or CD ANTENNA The antenna cannot be shortened but can be removed When you need to remove the antenna turn the antenna rod counterclockwise To install the antenna rod turn the antenna clock wise Tighten the antenna rod to specification using a suitable tool such as an open end wrench The antenna rod tightening specification is 3 4 3 6 N m 30 32 in lb Do not use pliers to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the antenna surface The antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification ACAUTION Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation 4 56 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems NISS
208. dren unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents WPD0311 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY Manual if so equipped To lock a door turn the key toward the front of the vehicle Q To unlock turn the key toward the rear LPD0240 Power if so equipped The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front Q of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0241 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door wit
209. driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashe
210. e 4 wheel drive system The difference in wheel rotation is large The 4WD warning light is located in the meter The 4WD warning light comes on when the key switch is turned to ON It turns off soon after the engine is started If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the key switch is ON the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD shift indicator light goes out A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly about once per two seconds Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast ACAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on When the warning light comes on the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H Be especially careful when driving If corresponding parts are malfunctioning the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard su
211. e rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper Operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor pressure sensor 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury e Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unautho rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual
212. e ABS system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON Also the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON AWARNING Never leave the E Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard surfaced roads Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury After us ing the E Lock system to free the ve hicle turn the system OFF Use the E Lock system only when free ing a stuck vehicle Try the 4LO position before using the E Lock system Never use the E Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur face Using the E Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the ve hicle during engine braking accelerat ing or turning which may result in an accident and serious personal injury Starting and driving 5 29 PARKING PARKING ON HILLS ACAUTION e After using the E Lock system turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use eects BS Bs Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 12 mph 20 km h when the system is engaged Doing so could damage drivetrain components Do not turn on the E lock system while the tires are spinning Doing so could damage drivetrain components WSD0050 AWARNING Never leave the engine running while e Do not
213. e Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons
214. e 4 46 R dio cag ww oa week ye rupeaa 4 30 Rear audio controls aoaaa aaa 4 55 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 54 Autolight switch oaaae 2 30 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 24 Automatic power window switch 2 50 Automatic transmission position indicator light ae a Baa deed te et aN a dat dene A 2 24 Driving with automatic transmission Transmission shift selector lock release 5 18 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 17 Automatic door locks 004 3 6 Automatic transmission fluid temperature GQAUQe ie Sak a ee Ber he ea ace ap ee 2 8 AUX ACK oes ae ee a eS ea ew 4 52 B Back button sa se d aymat bata ee 4 4 3 Battes i a ir a ake eee GE oy ac 8 14 Charge warning light aaa aa aaa 2 15 Before starting the engine 5 11 Belt See drive belt nnana aaa 8 16 Block heater Engien os secreten aw tenia 5 38 Bluetooth hands free phone system 4 66 Booster seats 2102 ete Se he Ge ee ale 1 41 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 32 Brake fluids s e i 28 sade ay aed 8 12 Brake light See stop light 8 28 Brake system 2 2 0 0 00005 5 31 Brake warning light 2 2 14 Brake wear indicators 2 20 8 21 Parking brake operation 5 19 Self adjusting brakes 0 8 21 Brake Sie sc et aos we a ea Ge ee a 8 21 Break in schedule 4 5 22 Brightness control Instrum
215. e Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands e Ringtone The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone If you say No the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit Silent The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone Bluetooth off Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System When the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem is off you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition Also you will not have access to the Phone Book You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup 4 78 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve rec ognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B If memory A is available the system will use memory A to store the model If memory A is in use and memory B is available the system will use memory B
216. e child restraint is re moved See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint 1 33 LRSO671 Forward facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 5 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0697 Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and s
217. e eee 2 35 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls 8 4 14 4 21 4 28 Heater operation 4 15 4 22 4 29 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 56 Hood release 2 2 ee 3 11 HOM esc ee kee RRs RRR eS 2 35 l Ignition switch so sc ee eee eee 5 9 Immobilizer system 2 26 3 2 5 11 Important vehicle information label 9 11 In cabin microfilter 2 0 ee eae 8 18 Increasing fuel economy 5 22 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 0 000 ee eee 9 13 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 17 Inside mirror aaa adaa 3 16 Instrument brightness control 2 32 Instrument panel 0 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 32 Interiotlights a0e 2 2k ee a a Peas 2 54 ISOFIX child restraints 1 26 J Jump starting o ose cc sep naana eae 6 8 K KEY i a eae ace p Pad ea aop Pea Sw 3 2 Keyfob battery replacement 8 24 Keyless entry system See remote keyless entry system 3 7 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 12 C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Engine serial number 9 11 F M V S S certification label 9 11 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Warning labels for SRS 1 59
218. e following systems e Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and roll over supplemental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and right front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions In a side impact the curtain and roll over air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a s
219. e into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water e Keep battery out of the reach of children e The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury 7 E r EAE a Cloth LS a B P Vehicle with os for A Cloth gt booster Se WCE0054 A WARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard Connect jumper cab
220. e sensitivity setting of the automatic headlights e Lower less sensitive automatic headlights will take longer to come on when the head light sensor senses less ambient light Higher more sensitive automatic headlights will come on quicker when the headlight sensor senses less ambient light Automatic Headlights Off Delay Select to change the setting for the length of time the automatic headlights remain on after exiting the vehicle Speed Dependent Wiper Select to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function Return All Settings to Default Select to change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS to their default settings 4 10 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems SYSTEM SETTINGS Language Unit Clock Beep Setting LHA0561 System settings Select the System Settings key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button The SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed Language unit The LANGUAGE UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language Unit key and pressing the ENTER button Language English or French Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C L 100 km You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button CLOCK SETTING
221. e should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system sions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in flated for a short time The side air bags and curtain an
222. e the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion Automatic transmission check CHECK ina warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 2 14 Instruments and controls ATP Automatic transmission park warning light g3z43 model AWARNING e If the ATP light is ON this indicates that the automatic transmission P Park po sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral When parking always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov ing unexpectedly resulting in serious personal injury or property damage e Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the shift selector to the P position and the ATP warning light is ON Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position move the shift selector to the N position once shift the shift selector into P again and make sure the ATP warning ligh
223. e under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off road use However avoid driving in deep wa ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use unlike a conventional off road ve hicle Remember that two wheel drive models are less capable than four wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud or the like Starting and driving 5 7 Please observe the following precautions AWARNING Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes Off road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward o
224. e vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0259 1 2 Tire wear and damage Wear indicator Location mark AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size
225. e will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Q Intermittent INT intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward Slower or Faster Also the inter mittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation speed will be faster Instruments and controls 2 27 NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion for vehicles with navigation system Refer to Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner au dio and phone systems section later in this manual Low LO continuous low speed operation High HI continuous high speed opera tion Push the lever up to have one sweep opera tion MIST of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before y
226. ear view Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 Nr ee Ssesnk LPD0268 LPD0259 LPD0269 Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to Type A Type B the desired position for better visibility while tow Manual folding outside mirrors if so ing a trailer equipped A WARNING Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it Do not extend or retract mirrors while driv ing You may lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex tended may cause damage to the vehicle 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments CLOSE LPD0196 Power folding outside mirrors if so equipped ACAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors Push the switch to open or close the mirrors If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point To correct electronic mirror op eration cycle the mirrors by pushing the CLOSE switch until completely closed then push the OPEN switch until the mirrors are in the open position Automatic anti glare outside mirror Driver s side only if so equipped The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the
227. eat audio controls For more information on rear seat audio controls see Rear Audio Controls earlier in this section Pressing the button on the front controls turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or disables the wireless headphones It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote control Headphones are a wireless type and no cables are necessary You can use them in almost all the ranges in the rear seat It is not possible to use the headphones in the front seat POWER on off button With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position press the POWER button to turn the DVD player on or off Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted the DVD player will automatically turn on 4 60 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems ACAUTION Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player MODE select button Press the MODE button to select Audio Video source between DVD and AUX input input jacks on the faceplate Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input and Yellow Video input The display will show the AUX in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the Mode is changed to AUX To use the input jacks refer to Auxiliary input jacks in this section Ci or gt PLAY
228. ecautions earlier in this section Audio main operation Power button and VOL control knob Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position then press the PWR power button If you listen to the radio with the engine not running place the ignition switch in the ACC position The mode radio or CD that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes play ing When no CD is loaded the radio comes on Pressing the PWR button again turns the system off Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume MENU button BASS TREBLE FADE BALANCE and CLOCK Press the MENU button to change the mode as follows BAS TRE FAD BAL CLOCK Audio BAS Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 37 To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the MENU button until the desired mode appears in the display Press the SEEK button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the MENU button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds NOTE If the clock is ena
229. echnical and consumer in formation section of this manual AWARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a colli sion people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly E H S T LPD0271 Removing the tailgate 1 Release the tailgate support cables A CAUTION e The tailgate is heavy Two people should remove or install it Be careful not to drop it during removal e After releasing the support cables do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper 2 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle 3 Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge 4 Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge Installing the tailgate 1 Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge 2 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert into the left side hinge 3 Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and attach the tailgate support cables 4 Close the tailgate securely LPD0272 LT10102 Locking the tailgate To unlock the tailgate turn the key toward the passenger side of the vehicle 4 To lock turn the key toward the driver side Both the master key and the valet key can be used t
230. ed Also see Pairing procedure in this section for ad ditional information Up to 5 phones can be paired If you try to pair a sixth phone the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle s system the system an nounces the name the phone is already using The pairing procedure will then be cancelled When prompted by the system choose from the following commands New phone Refer to Pairing proce dure in this section Replace phone The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace the pairing procedure will begin Refer to Pairing procedure in this section e List phone See the description below List phone Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired If no phones are paired the system announces No paired phones to list The system then ends the VR session Select phone Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem are in the vehicle at the same time The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection Once the selection is confirmed the selected phone remains active until the i
231. ed phone list and pairing You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 67 Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While acellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones Ifthe hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise
232. ed with the com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play CD DVD button Type A and D only Press the CD DVD button to toggle the radio between CD and DVD modes When the CD DVD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD DVD button is pressed with the compact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play For more information on the DVD system see Playing a digital video disc DVD later in this section ri PI SEEK TRACK button When the I button is pressed while a com pact disc is playing the track being played re turns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the gt button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will ad vance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played EE gt gt TUNE FOLDER CAT button Type A B C and D only CD e While playing a CD press and hold the TUNE FOLDER CAT button 44 or PP to fast for
233. ediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed h
234. een completed and the sys tem is ready The SA mode will stop if The 4 amp 4 button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phone book new entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number setup pair phone memo pad play eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phone book delete entry memo pad record dial star two one seven oh Yes No select ring tone dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on setup change priority call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one Home four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phone book list names call eight oh five four one Correction setup change ring tone dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu Delete dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 79 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If pr
235. el cap warning reset but ton in the meter for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tightening the fuel filler cap Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT if so equipped LPD0254 LPD0255 TILT OPERATION AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi tion Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad justed for driving comfort Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the brake and accelerator pedal position away from the driver or toward the driver The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad justed separately AWARNING Do not adjust the pedal position while driving You can lose control of your ve hicle and cause an accident ACAUTION Do not adjust the pedal position with your foot on the pedal SUN VISORS j J LPD0273 OP T ara Type A LPD0264 Type B To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side To block glare from the side and front
236. en gine braking e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning e Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH 100 km h Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system e Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4LO and 4H while driving Starting and driving 5 27 I AWD shift indicator light The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle information display LSD0147 The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other When the shifting is com pleted the 4WD shift indicator light will come on 5 28 Starting and driving If the 4WD warning light comes on the AWD indicator light goes out ACAUTION e If the 4WD shift indicator light indica tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system If the indi cator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer 4WD warning light Comes on or blinks when Warning light There is a mal function in th
237. en irens Child restraints 0 caccvetedsawdvor sa ave toiu dante Precautions on child restraints 005 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System 0 0 02 ccc eects Rear facing child restraint installation using LAI CH citamcce ospita s iee A a a E Rear facing child restraint installation using ihe seat Delis irere renae ne e a Ai Forward facing child restraint installation using LATCH v2ssciceacda mee oesn avd baw kenbinii Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat belts front passenger and rear DENCH Seat i cccan dead eneen ed poieni eni Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat belts front bench center POSILION s peceren deresi gaa eee sede a nakoes peras Installing top tether strap Rear bench seat Booster SOAS yra Sinire ceneeinencttia tne Gixcetcnahar eia Supplemental restraint system 00 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSIOM ashe tees ce a E cenit a Penscnenueam Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light SEATS ARS1152 AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e
238. ending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires You can also check the pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen The order of the tire pressure figures dis played on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the In case of emergency section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle dam
239. ent panel naana ann 2 32 Brightness contrast button 4 13 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement 8 28 c Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants lt sos aaa aieo ee 9 2 Car phone or CBradio 4 66 Cargo light switch aoaaa aaa 2 34 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 13 CD care and cleaning oaaae 4 53 CD changer See audio system 4 50 CD player See audio system Check tire pressure ooa Child restraints 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 26 Precautions on child restraints 1 24 1 30 1 34 1 41 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 28 Child safety rear doorlock 3 7 Chimes audible reminders 2 20 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 CloCk ie cae ee a kd 4 38 4 46 models with navigation system 4 11 Clock Sets a s ena aie eee ded 4 11 C M V S S certification label 9 11 Cold weather driving 5 37 Compact disc CD player 4 39 Control panel buttons 4 2 Back button ke ee eee si 4 3 Brightness contrast button 4 13 Enter Dutton es cas eee oe eee 4 2 Setting button 62 4 bee ee eae BH 4 7 Startup screen 2 ee ee ee 4 3 Tip DUTON oe See eee oni cs GR a Ge 4 4 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 54 Heater and air conditioner GOMHONS ss ate Fa aa a a 4 14 4 21 4 28 Rear audio controls 4
240. er cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will use up all the battery power and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Display key This is a select key on the screen By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen Move the joystick up down left or right to highlight an item Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON This button has two functions Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button ac cepts the changes made during setup SETTING UP THE START UP SCREEN When you place the ignition s
241. er condition Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand M
242. er has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction AWARNING e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer ing operation at high speeds or by care less or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling per formance and the SLIP indicator may flash or both the SLIP and re indica tor lights may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system my not operate properly and both the SLIP and the OFE indicator lights may illuminate e If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated both the SLIP and fer indicator lights may illuminate When dri
243. ere should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when
244. ered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety e Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles AWARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping
245. ervoir DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction 5 38 Starting and driving e Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement e Allow greater following distances on slippery roads e Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers e Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads e Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped AWARNING e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection e Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could re
246. escent nena 8 21 Changing engine coolant sssserrererrrreee 8 8 FUSES oirne rentida E wake tod 8 21 Engine oil pie cies Hee e eee eees 8 9 Engine compartment 0scereceeeeee ees 8 29 Checking engine oil level 0 085 8 9 Passenger compartment 0 ee eee 8 23 Changing engine oil 0 eee 8 10 nee Battery replacement 00 cece eee eee eee 8 24 Changing engine oil filter 0 0 8 11 Keyfob if ned 8 25 5 speed automatic transmission fluid 8 11 Ligh Soe ee RPh re eng eae pore eG TERED 8 96 Power steering fluid 00 2s eee 8 12 Ne sete eeRase em prejaire eei Brake fluid 00 0 0c cccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 12 Headlights ee 8 26 Brake fluid 0 0ccccccceeeeeseeeseeeee esas 8 13 Fog lights if so equipped 60 8 26 Windshield washer fluid 0000c0e0eeee neces 8 13 Exterior andiintetior lights cctask etiam ssp she whos 8 28 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 13 Wheels and tires 2000 ese eee eee e eee es 8 31 Battery accented avatars ay ik AE ES eect 8 14 Tire PreSSUFE 6 ees 8 32 Jump Starting ise bpic ries stance eis aaa 8 15 Tire labeling iesi ss teccisvesea sede ea meccee 8 36 Variable voltage control system 0000 8 15 TYPES OF TES opis td vadeads dct elke oE 8 38 Drive Delfin ictuhertget uke attend besten wighntiis man a 8 16 Tre CRAIN sacs ich ca
247. ess the REAR ON OFF button on the front radio control panel to turn the rear controls on Push the button again to turn the rear controls off The headphones symbol illuminates on the front display when the rear audio controls are on Two headphone jacks are provided so two rear seat passengers may listen to the audio system pri vately The rear volume controls can only increase the volume to the level at which the front radio volume control is set One or two infrared headphones are included if the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain ment system Most portable radio headphones work with the rear audio controls For vehicles equipped with the FM AM SAT radio with compact disc player if the rear passengers turn off the rear speakers and are using head phones they may choose to listen to a different media than the front passengers The rear pas sengers can listen to the radio along with the front passengers or they can listen to a CD or SAT radio if so equipped Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 55 VOL volume button The VOL button allows the rear passengers to adjust the headphone volume level The vehicle volume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL is enabled and the rear audio mode is the same as the front oid SPEAKER CONTROL button Press this button to turn the rear speakers off and headphones on Press this i button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and hea
248. et Select the Reset key on screen by press ing the ENTER button or Press the TRIP button for more than approxi mately 1 5 seconds 4 4 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 12 31 FUEL ECONOMY Average Fuel Economy Mph Reset Fuel Economy Distance to Empty 73 miles a LHA0553 Fuel economy Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel Economy and Distance To Empty Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mile 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery cables the display will show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the TRIP button repeatedly until the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown then ei ther Select the Reset key on screen by press ing the ENTER button or Press the TRIP button for more than approxi mately 1 5 seconds Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE Ifthe amount of fuel
249. etails see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Starting and driving 5 37 SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e Ascraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support e A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts e Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield washer fluid res
250. fic amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer Technical and consumer information 9 33 Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking sys tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equip ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system i A LT10117 example Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing a
251. fication as per the on screen instructions MENU If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU button is pressed the DVD menu will appear on the screen Use the Navigation Keys to navigate within the menu and use ENTER to select the item Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY mode TITLE Remote control only Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media to the title of the DVD Press the TITLE button again to return to the previous stop point and play BACK Remote control only Press the BACK button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu 4 62 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems SUBTITLE Remote control only Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle selection menu Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle through each available subtitle AUDIO Remote control only Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio menu Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle through each available audio track ANGLE Remote control only Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera angle menu Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle through each available angle CLEAR Remote control only Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric inputs if actuated prior to expiration of the 3 second timer NUMERIC KEYPAD 0 9 amp gt 10 Remote control only Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access disc chapters titles or trac
252. forward buttons When the TUNE 44 or P gt button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc plays at an increased speed while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc returns to normal play speed i PI SEEK buttons When PI is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning Press gt l several times to skip several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD ad vances 1 additional track The track number ap pears in the display window When the last track on the compact disc is skipped the first track is played When I is pressed the track being played returns to the beginning Press 4 several times to skip back several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back one track Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 39 SEEK Scan CDs button Press and hold the SEEK gt l button for more than 1 5 seconds to scan through the first 10 seconds of a track on the compact disc The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all the tracks on the disc or if the SEEK M or gt I button is pressed during the scan mode RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while the com pact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows 1 Normal 1 The track that is currently
253. g the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 5 4 Starting and driving Additional information e The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After all 4 tires are is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap pears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi nated and low tire pressure is detected The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off e The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction e Tire pressure rises and falls dep
254. g to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish e Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS AWARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury e NEVER place a floor mat on top of an other floor mat in the driver front position e Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve hicle model See your NISSAN dealer for more information e Properly position the mats in the floor well using the floor mat positioning aid See Floor mat p
255. gate lathi lt si aed aie te ees ye ae 3 22 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Three way catalyst 0 0 2 000008 5 2 Tie down hooks sos so ee te ee ed 3 23 Tilting steering wheel 00 3 14 Tire Flat tires lt 4 eae ee ae ee eee a 6 2 Spare tire soes ko he ew a 6 3 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Tire chaighe cae Aed Saree dae ad 8 39 Tire placard sas a0 4 cie 8 gana d 9 12 Tire pressures cg eatp wae nea ioi 8 31 Tirer tati oia 2 send eee pa we ed 8 39 Tires of 4 wheel drive 8 41 Types Of tires ca io we a ee ee 8 38 Uniform tire quality grading 9 39 Wheels andtires 00 8 31 Wheel tire size 2 ee 9 9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Tire pressure display 00 4 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Tire rotation maintenance reminder 4 7 Tow mode switch 0 0005 2 38 Towing 2 wheel drive models 6 12 4 wheel drive models 6 13 Flat towing 4 22 3 66 bod oe ded 9 39 Tow truck towing tac inaota E ea Ka 6 11 Towing load specification 9 28 Traller TOWING ee do 2 0 2 eee eee 9 24 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 56 Transmission Driving with
256. ger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled WIC0845 DaRoN Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side automatic switch Right rear passenger window switch Left rear passenger window switch Driver side automatic switch Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows To open a window push the switch and hold it down To close a window pull the switch and hold it up To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch LIC0580 Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch and hold it down To close the window pull the switch up Instruments and controls 2 49 LICO581 LICO410 Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function 2 50 Instruments and controls Automatic operation To fully open a win
257. ght operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual EO High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated SERVICE ENGine Malfunction Indicator Light SOON MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank ERVICE After a few driving trips the 87 light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light
258. gnition switch is placed in the OFF position or you select a new phone Change priority Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone The priority level determines which phone is ac tive when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level 1 2 3 4 5 If the new priority level is already being used for another phone the two phones will swap priority levels Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 77 For example if the current priority levels are Priority Level 1 Phone A Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1 then Priority Level 1 Phone C Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone A Delete phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone all phones or listen to the list again Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones the system asks you to confirm this action NOTE When you delete a phone the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted Select ringtone Use th
259. h are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs AIR CLEANER WDI0712 The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance og shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide To remove the air cleaner filter Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward 2 Remove the air cleaner filter 3 Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous ing and the cover with a damp cloth Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 NOTE After installing a new air cleaner make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips AWARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed e Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter i
260. hard surfaced roads Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury After us ing the E Lock system to free the ve hicle turn the system OFF e Use the E Lock system only when free ing a stuck vehicle Try the 4LO position before using the E Lock system Never use the E Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur face Using the E Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the ve hicle during engine braking accelerat ing or turning which may result in an accident and serious personal injury ACAUTION e After using the E Lock system turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use Do not drive over 12 MPH 20 km h when the system is engaged Doing so could result in possible damage to the driveline e Do not turn on the E lock system while the tires are spinning Doing so could damage drivetrain components REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped CCED OFF LIC0471 A WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The rear sonar system is active when the ignition switch is placed is placed to the ON position and the shift selector is in R Reverse When sensors detect
261. hat key fob This will prevent the keyfob from un authorized use to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing proce dure please contact a NISSAN dealer M q LPD0209 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors Close all windows Remove the key from the ignition switch 2 3 Close the hood and all doors 4 Press the button on the keyfob All the doors lock The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pressed with all doors locked the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked f a door is open and you press the button the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash The horn may or may not beep For vehicles without navigation system refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section For ve hicles with navigation system refer to How to use the setting button in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section later in this manual a LPD0210 Unlocking doors Press the M button on the keyfob once Only the driver s door unlocks The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the ON posi tion The interior lights an
262. he SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function in this sec tion Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 The driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat will automatical
263. he following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 2 position 2WD and AUTO 71 MPH 115 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 4H 62 MPH 100 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h w o tow mode 27 MPH 44 km h w tow mode 1 Low gear Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 1 position 2WD and AUTO 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4H 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4LO 19 MPH 30 km h w o tow mode 16 MPH 27 km h w tow mode Starting and driving 5 15 LSD0099 To move the shift selector Shift while depressing the brake pedal O gt Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting column After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position 5 16 Starting and driving AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehic
264. he system is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the POWER VOLUME or PWR VOL control knob Turn the POWER VOLUME or PWR VOL con trol knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes AUDIO knob BASS MIDRANGE TREBLE FADE BALANCE and SSV if so equipped Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows BASS MID TREBLE FADE BALANCE SSV if so equipped To adjust Bass Mid Midrange Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers To change the SSV mode to OFF LOW MID or HIGH turn the Tuning knob to the right or left Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds 4 46 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Clock set Type C and D only 1 Press and hold the H button to advance
265. he tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves e Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer Appearance and care 7 3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury 7 4 Appearance and care ACAUTION e Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damagin
266. he upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds and the last disc position will be stored When the PLAY button is pressed again it will resume at the stored disc track and time position If the STOP button is pressed again when the player is already in Stop mode it will reinitialize the pointer to the beginning of the disc In effect it will ignore the last stored disc position and upon receipt of the next play message will begin at the Title Menu or at the beginning of the disc amp EJECT When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVD loaded it will be ejected The display will show the EJECT symbol 4 in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the EJECT button is pressed If the DVD is not loaded the display will show NO DISC If the DVD comes out and is not removed within 25 seconds it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it DISPLAY If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2 seconds the display menu will appear on the screen The display menu will remain on the screen for 10 seconds if no subsequent control activations occur e Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within the display menu and use ENTER to select the item e Holding the DISPLAY control on the face plate for longer than approximately 2 sec onds while in the display menu will reset the display characteristics to their nominal val ues Faceplate feature only Display screen he
267. he vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer It displays such items as automatic transmission position indicator cruise control system information if so equipped some indicators and warnings HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the vehicle information display INFO but ton located on the instrument panel to toggle through the following modes MPG Range Warning Rotate the INFO button to highlight the de sired menu option within the selected mode Press the INFO button to enter the high lighted menu The icons at the bottom of the display screen show the options available ENTER Press the INFO button to select a highlighted option 2 NEXT Rotate the INFO button to high light an option Instruments and controls 2 21 gt SKIP gt DETAIL ENTER NEXT WIC1166 Warning mode if so equipped The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle information dis play warnings and indicators later in this section 2 22 Instruments and controls WARNING A WARNING oro RANGE 2 ogo i WARNING 0 0 on LOW WASHER RELEASE PARKING WARNING o
268. heard If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING e To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL LDI0370 LDI0371 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature 3 Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan 4 Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oi level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If
269. heck the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver type frame mounted hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and gooseneck trailers can also be installed on your vehicle Contact a professional supplier of towing equip ment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or goose neck hitch installed 9 30 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball e Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of
270. hicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your keys in the ignition and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the from the ignition switch 3 Close all doors Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the key power door lock switch if the door is opened locked and then closed or with the keyfob Instruments and controls 2 25 Keyfob operation Push the button on the keyfob All doors lock The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate
271. hours 2 Press and hold the M button to advance minutes For setting the clock on Type A and B audio systems see Adjusting the time in this section Clock set Type E only 1 Press the DISP CLOCK button until it beeps gt 1 5 seconds 2 The hours will start flashing Press the CAT FOLDER 44 or PP button or SEEK TRACK M or PI button to adjust the hours 3 Press the DISP CLOCK button again to switch to the minute adjustment 4 Press the CAT FOLDER 44 or gt button or SEEK TRACK M or Pl button to adjust the minutes 5 Press the DISP CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode The display will return to the regular clock display after 7 seconds or you may press the DISP CLOCK button again to return to the regu lar clock display For setting the clock on Type A and B audio systems see Adjusting the time in this section DISP display button The DISP display button will show text about MP3 SAT or CD information in the audio display CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Disc title Track title To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display then rotate the knob to select the following display modes Type A B and E Disc number Folder number Type C and D Disc title
272. hout the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position C then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position E iA SE Q WPD0381 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH if so equipped To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open all doors will lock and then unlock automatically This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle LPD0278 LPD0266 WIDE OPEN DOORS if so equipped ACAUTION Do not open the Wide Open door to the full open position while the fuel filler door is open only open it as far as the first detent Opening the door to the full open position may damage the fuel filler door and Wide Open door The Wide Open doors open nearly 180 to allow access to the rear of the cab 1 Open the driver s or passenger s door 2 From the outside pull the door handle toward you Pre driv
273. ighest broadcasting station is reached the radio continues in the seek mode at the lowest broadcasting station Station memory operations 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations 1 Press the PRESET A B C button to change between storage banks The radio displays the icon A B or C to indicate which set of presets are active 2 Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard The radio mutes when the select button is pressed 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play PP p gt TUNE rewind and fast
274. ignition switch is placed in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the automatic anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operat ing To turn off the anti glare feature press the 0 button on the rearview mirror The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature again press the button on the rearview mirror The in dicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear view mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in this section Heated mirrors if so equipped Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 TRUCK BOX LPD0270 TAILGATE Opening the tailgate Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the tailgate The support cables hold the tailgate open When closing the tailgate make sure the latches are securely locked Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down unless equipped with NISSAN s Bed Extender accessory or equivalent in the extended position 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments For proper truck box loading see Vehicle loading information in the T
275. in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Booster seat installation on front passenger seat and rear seat ACAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraints and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system wy WRS0699 1 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position 2 Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions 1 43 LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraints in this sec tion for head restraint adjustment removal and installa
276. inally installed on the vehicle at the factory Maintenance and do it yourself Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The recom mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section Spare tire size or compact spare tire size if so equipped 4 Read the tire pressure on the gauge Size Cold Tire Inflation stem and compare to the specifica Press re tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Ee i Tire 5 Add air to the tire as needed If too P975 70R18 240 kPa 35 PSI much air is added press the core of P275 60R20 the valve stem briefly with the tip of BearOranal Tie the gauge stem to release pressure areh p E Recheck the pressure and add or P275 70R18 240 kPa 35 PSI release air as needed P275 60R20 6 Install the valve stem cap Spare Tire LDI0393 7 Check the pressure of all other tires P265 70R18 Checking tire pressure including the spare P275 70R18 AR P275 60R20 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire 2 Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side
277. ination light Tail Stop 3157K Backup reversing 921LF Turn 3156K Tailgate light if so equipped 921 License plate light W5W See a NISSAN dealer for replacement Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0409 FON gt oo Room map light if so equipped Personal lights if so equipped Step light if so equipped Puddle light Side turn signal light if so equipped High mount stoplight cargo lights License plate light Rear combination tailgate light if so equipped assembly Fog light if so equipped Headlight assembly WDI0263 LDI0389 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover cf Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation Interior map lights Use a cloth to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 LDI0364 Personal lights If so equipped Use a cloth to protect the housing 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0385 Vanity mirror If so equipped Use a cloth to protect the housing LDI0341 Step light If so equipped Use a cloth to protect the housing WHEELS AND TIRES LDI0388 Puddle light If so equipped License plate light Use a cloth to
278. increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load jo Tongue load Total trailer load Tongue load ies a x 100 10 to 15 WTI0160 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib uting hitch keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu facturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load King pin load When using a 5th wheel hitch keep the tongue load between 15 25 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum king pin load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the king pin load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper king pin load Technical and consumer information 9 25 DO ea Fy vehicle weight ool lt 2 gt aoe Gross axle weight CA
279. ine The following lights will come on 7 erae or BF A wo Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light if so equipped Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Electronic locking rear differential E Lock sys tem on indicator light if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light The following lights come on briefly and then go off ABS or SUP 1 oe AT CHECK HO High beam indicator light Blue SERGE Malfunction indicator light MIL SOON gt Security indicator light if so equipped Slip indicator light a Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section Instruments and controls 2 13 Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light ABS When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Hav
280. ing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quenily For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual Tow mode Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF Tow mode includes the following features e Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade Downhill Speed Control DSC automati cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no t
281. ing checks and adjustments 3 5 LPD0267 LPD0265 From the inside pull the inside door handle to 3 Open the door to the desired position 1 Close all doors ward yet lias door yall unlockiautomaticaly AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS if so 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position equipped 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 All doors lock automatically when the vehicle push and hold the power door lock switch to speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h the 4 position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds e All doors unlock automatically when the MeS i transmission is placed in the P Park posi 4 When activated the hazard indicator will tion flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once The automatic unlock function can be de activated or activated To deactivate or acti 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the vate the automatic door unlock system perform OFF and ON position again between each the following procedure setting change 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments When the automatic door unlock system is deac tivated the doors do not unlock when the trans mission is placed in the P Park position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side LPD0242 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Crew Cab models only Child safety locks help prevent the rear do
282. ing dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Avoid high speed driv ing and abrupt braking See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light in this section If this light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately Charge warning light A CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual e Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing Engine oil pressure low
283. ion and push the A C button to turn on the air conditioner A C will appear on the display when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner pushthe A C button again The display will show A C OFF The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch For more information about the rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual 4 22 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets 1 Push the gt button to the OFF position for normal heating The indicator light on the CS button will go off will ap pear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the s position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Push the C amp gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the gt button will go off S will appear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow control dial t
284. ions 9 6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations s isig ce craidtcncnc egies mune y eran ose 9 7 SPSCHICATONS 2 82 2 hb i ea a EAA 9 8 ENGINS ere ar EEE E 9 8 Wheels and tires 0 0 e eee ee eee ee 9 9 Dimensions and weights cece eae 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY pes consisterait innui Si wean se aad 9 10 Vehicleidentificatioi seges roep reda ea oneen 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle identification number chassis number 000c cece eee cece eeaeee 9 10 Engine serial number 0 0 00 ccc eee 9 11 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Tire and loading information label 9 12 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Installing front license plate 0 0 9 12 Vehicle loading information c cece eee 9 13 T A nbaadovbaand uae ee 9 13 Vehicle load capacity 0 eee eee 9 13 Securing the load ee eee ee eae 9 15 Utili track channel system if so equipped 9 16 Loading UPSh sich soicinsie eas aes esaou no rade ene cad 9 21 Truck camper loading information 005 9 22 Crew Cab Models 000 eee eee 9 22 King Cab models 00 eee eee eee es 9 22 Special Body vehicles 0055 9 22 Lo
285. ir bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags inflators Air bag Control Unit ACU Supplemental front impact air bag mod ules Crash zone sensor Occupant classification system control unit Occupant classification sensor pres sure sensor Seat belt buckle switches Seat belt with pretensioner Satellite sensors Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and right front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The supplemental front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions al though they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from
286. ir outlet 7 Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets 3 Air flows from defroster and foot outlets 7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the S OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 29 LICO836 The sunload sensor Q located on the top center of the instrument panel helps the system main tain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual ANISSAN dealer is a
287. ire e To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator or coolant reser voir cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury e Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure engine coolant temperature high indicator light or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing o
288. is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure Instruments and controls 2 11 1 With the display turned on press and hold the button for about 13 seconds or the for about 10 seconds The C icon in the compass display will illuminate 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal A CAUTION e Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 12 Instruments and controls WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS ABS or Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light AT Automatic transmission check warning light CHECK ATP Automatic transmission park warning light EEZy model Brake warning light Charge warning light Engine oil pressure low engine coolant tem perature high warning light 4WD warning light E329 model CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the eng
289. is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air iP 2 Push the gt button to the OFF position Turn the air flow control dial to the position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Push the A C button The indicator light onthe A C button will come on A C will appear on the display if so equipped Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the SS button to the ON position The indicator light on the button will come on amp will appear on the display if so equipped Be sure to return the C amp P to the OFF position for normal cooling The indicator light on the CS gt button will go off Swill ap pear on the display if so equipped You may also select MAX A C for quick cooling Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 5 Push the gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the C button will go off S will appear on the display if so equipped Turn the air flow control dial to the yi position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Push the A C button on The indicator light onthe A C button will come on A C will appear on the display if so equipped
290. ithin 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs e Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 20 seconds or the amp button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only 4 52 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems WHAO0869 AUX jack if so equipped The AUX jack is located below the air condi tioner controls The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the 1 gt side of a pen or pencil as illustrated MODE l PWR 4 LHA0049 WHA0611 CD CARE AND CLEANING Type A Volume control switch MODE select switch Power on off switch Tuning switch e Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the disc Never touch the surface of the disc AODH e Always pl
291. ity may also result in failure of other ve hicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT TOTAL x FRONT x REAR x TOTAL AVANT ARRIERE SEATING CAPACITY a NOMBRE DE PLACES THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XX kg OR XX Ibs LE POIDS COMBINE D OCCUPANTS ET DE CARGAISON NE DEVRAIT JAMAIS EXC DER XX nan OU XX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE TAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE FRONT AVANT PXXX XXRXX SPARE TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE A PRESSION DE GONFLAGE FROW FOR ADDITIONAL XXX kPa XX PSI POUR D AUTRES PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI WAEA arse OUE DE SECOURS PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI INFORMATION AU MANUEL DU CONDUCTEUR LDI0485 Tire 8 34 and loading information label Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle Vehicle load limit See loading infor mation in the Technical and con sumer information section Original tire size The size of the tires orig
292. iven Changing the display Pushing the change button changes the display as follows Trip A Trip B_ Odometer only Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available for vehicles with a navigation system Refer to Control panel buttons in the Display screen heater air condi tioner audio and phone systems Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero Instruments and controls 2 5 WIC1246 LIC1135 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev the engine into the red zone 4 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage 2 6 Instruments and controls ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions ACAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle
293. iving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged 5 22 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the front wheels in correct alignment Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag For vehicles equipped with use 4H or 4L position only when necessary Four wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy
294. km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch e Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed e Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h Starting and driving 5 21 BREAK IN SCHEDULE ACAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance e Avoid dr
295. ks by inputting their numeric value Use the gt 10 button to input numbers greater than or equal to 10 Up to three digits can be inputted when selecting the chapter title track number The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will continuously shift the previously input number to the left The chapter title track number will be automati cally selected if valid based on media content if 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs The operator can cancel the input chapter title track number by actuating the CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the 3 second timer These functions can be used only for the DVD discs which correspond to them Auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control panel Compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica tion purposes Yellow video input White left channel audio input Red right channel audio input To view the compatible device connected to the AUX jacks press the MODE button For more information see Mode select button earlier in this section CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System DVD player face screen remote control etc Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions belo
296. l a slide in camper and is based on the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations It is recommended that before in stalling the camper you carefully read the follow ing information and ensure that the camper meets the specifications This information may not apply to some Canada model vehicles SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies However this Owner s Manual does not cover these options For further infor mation please refer to the body manufacturer s instruction manual 9 22 Technical and consumer information Recommended cargo center of gravity location WTI0195 LOCATION FOR CENTER OF GRAVITY The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location King Cab short wheel base L1 43 9 in 1 115 7 mm Crew Cab long wheel base L1 47 9 in 1 215 7 mm AWARNING Improper loading may be dangerous If a load is too far back it can affect handling characteristics If a load is too far forward the front axle may be overloaded Camper center of gravity m On Recommended cargo center of gravity location LTI0129 When the truck is used to carry a slide in camper the total cargo load of the truck consists of the camper manufacturer s weight figure plus the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the camper manufacturer s weight figure the weight of campe
297. l knob BASS MID TREBLE FADE and BALANCE No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 41 3 4 SEEK gt TRACK Ve PRESET ABC 5 MP3 WMA CD6 CHANGER DISP a4 TUNE p SCAN FOLDER CAT RPT cD FM AM SAT aux 10 i i i i 6 7 8 9 11 Loap G 4 _ 13 SS ee ee PUSH 12 PUSH POWER AUDIO 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 ReDeS VOLUME TUNES TRACK 15 WHA0865 Type B 1 SEEK TRACK button 6 CD button 2 TUNE FOLDER CAT button 7 FM button 3 DISP button 8 AM button 4 SCAN RPT button 9 SAT satellite button 5 PRESET A B C button 10 AUX button 4 42 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 1I 12 13 14 15 16 LOAD button CD insert slot CD eject button POWER VOLUME control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons Tuning and AUDIO control knob BASS MID TREBLE FADE and BALANCE No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed to access satel lite radio stations unles
298. larm LPD0211 If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 0 button on the keyfob for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when it has run for 25 seconds or any button is pressed on the keyfob 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0262 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the keyfob NOTE If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered HOOD 7 AY SZ SESS s S PQ LL LPD0244 Pull the hood lock release handle located
299. later in this section cator lights will be on or flashing indicator light will also turn on when Starting and driving 5 25 The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions There are three types of drive modes available 2WD 4H and 4LO The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation Rotate the switch to move between each mode 2WD 4H and 4LO To change into or out of 4LO the vehicle MUST be stationary shift the shift selector to neutral and depress the brake pedal The switch must be pushed and turned to select 4LO AWARNING e When parking apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off Otherwise the vehicle could unexpect edly move even if the automatic trans mission is in the P position The 4LO indicator light must stop blink ing and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear If the shift selector is shifted from the N position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking the vehicle may move unexpectedly 5 26 Starting and driving ACAUTION e Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4LO and 4H while driving e The 4H position provides greater trac tion Avoid excessive speed as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures and could damage
300. ld be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving 4 Fourth gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 4 position 4H 62 MPH 100 km h 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h 3 Third gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous 2 Second gear Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak ing on downhill grades Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over t
301. le is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the key can be turned to LOCK P Park ACAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse ACAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving WSD0188 Manual shift m
302. leaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation t LPD0446 Type A Type A With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the button as described To turn off the anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating For more information about the compass and compass features 2 if so equipped see Compass display in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 Ze A LPD0447 Type B Type B With the ignition switch in the ON position press the button as described To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual For information on the compass and compas
303. lear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades ACAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 WDI10408 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove ii Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place gi Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION e After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure 9 9 X co AD If you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle This may cause clogging or improper wind shield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equi
304. les in the sequence il lustrated ACAUTION Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started ACAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid In case of emergency 6 9 PUSH STARTING AWARNING Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged ACAUTION Automatic transmission models cannot be push started or tow started Attempt ing to do so may cause transmission damage 6 10 Incase of emergency IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle f
305. light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears in the vehicle information display If you select the tire pressure information in the display if so equipped the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be dis played The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated For additional information see Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS
306. ll fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle e When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle ACAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lec
307. ll require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system Technical and consumer information 9 7 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VK56DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 8 cylinder V block Slanted at 90 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 858 x 3 622 98 x 92 Displacement cu in cm8 338 78 5 552 Firing order 1 8 7 3 6 5 4 2 Idle speed A T in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle No adjustment is necessary Standard Model FFV Model DILFR5A 11 DILFR5A 11D Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Spark plug 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Overall length Wheels Short wheel base SWB in mm 224 6 5 704 18x 8 0J Long wheel base LWB in mm 244 3 6 204 Overall width in mm
308. lling the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the ve hicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or
309. lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park position FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 LRS0427 GH A LRS0633 Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30
310. lowed Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuit able for use when ambient temperatures fall be low O F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for you engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesita tions until the engine is fully warmed up Fuel consumption Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gal lon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your fuel mileage to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with etha nol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts ACAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle and may also affect the warranty coverage Maintenance If you operate your vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the correct maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide A CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability Technical and consumer information 9 5 API certification mark API service symbol WT10183 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the
311. ltipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is ac
312. ly move when the shift selector is placed in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The driver s seat will slide backward When the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver s door is opened When the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver s door open The driver s seat will return to the previous posi tion When the key is inserted into the ignition switch and the driver s door is closed When the driver s door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P Park position 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed For vehicles with a navigation system see Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or
313. may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the driver and right front passenger They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi tion After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is ope
314. more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure the display if so equipped of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pres sure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises This does not indicate a system mal function 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle In case of emergency 6 7 AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 6 8 In case of emergency JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING e If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle e Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery e Do not allow battery fluid to com
315. mper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights ACAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7 pin trailer harness connector If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4 pin connector an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle Adapters are available at NISSAN deal ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail ers Trailer brakes When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a speci
316. n check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ACAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover 3 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 WDI10452 Type A Type B 5 If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse 6 Push the fuse box cover to install 7 If anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0456 BATTERY REPLACEMENT ACAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts LDI0484 KEYFOB if so equipped Install a new battery with the facing down Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows Hold the battery by the edges Holding the Open the lid using a coin battery across the contact points will seri Remove the battery ously deplete the storage capacity Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
317. n aftermarket brake con troller 9 34 Technical and consumer information To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness perform the following proce dure 1 Open the driver door Move the seat to the rearmost position Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness to trailer brake controller BROWN WHITE Trailer brake controller i emteneoup RED BLUE Trailer brake controller eee iin RED Fused trailer brake con E eyen LTI0118 LTI0115 2 Apply the parking brake to access the 3 Locate the jumper harness connector under jumper harness connector the lower portion of the instrument panel The connector is taped to the wiring harness as indicated The connector is marked with a white tag with elec brake conn Technical and consumer information 9 35 LTI0116 Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector Release the parking brake 6 Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer s instructions 9 36 Technical and consumer information Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of eith
318. n loaded the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage Technical and consumer information 9 31 Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg Class II hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3 500 Ib 1 510 kg Class Ill hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg 9 32 Technical and consumer information Class IV hitch Class IV trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg Your vehicle m
319. n of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession e D3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag infor mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis tered trademarks
320. n of this manual MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely ACAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully APD1005 If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen lt S L If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points t
321. n operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel vehicle FFV your vehicle is designed to use E 85 Fuel Ethanol Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com bined ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Cer
322. n stop SEAT BELTS i oa SS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 Sit upright and weil back SSS0016 AWARNING AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this The seat belt should be properly ad vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may times Children should be properly re reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and if appro restraint system and increase the priate in a child restraint chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0014 AWARNING
323. n the switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle If it is difficult to free the vehicle rock the vehicle back and forth between reverse and drive gears If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud place stones or wooden blocks under the tires Then try the recovery procedures above Tire chains may be effective ACAUTION Do not spin the tires excessively Tires will sink deep into the mud making it difficult to free the vehicle Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction LSD0145 AWD shift switch operations Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD 4H or 4LO position depending on driving conditions e If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn accelerating or decelerating or if the key switch is turned off while in the 4H or 4LO you may feel a jolt This is not abnormal When the vehicle is stopped after mak ing a turn you may feel a slight jolt after the shift selector is shifted to N or P This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction ACAUTION When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing e Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears D1 or D2 for
324. n the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session Call Main Menu Call or Call International Name speak name Number speak digits Redial Call Back Name speak name If you have stored entries in the Phone Book you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phone book later in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Number speak digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle NOTE The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 73 If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call back Use the Call Back command to dial the
325. nally installed as shown in the chart NOTE To adjust the fog light vertical aim Access the aiming screw from underneath the front bumper The aiming screw is located on the bottom of the fog light housing Turn the screw clockwise to raise the pattern Turn the screw counterclockwise to lower the pattern Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust mois ture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light LDI0382 1 Disconnect the negative battery cable 2 The fog light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper 3 Disconnect the bulb connector Q 4 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re move 5 Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it Do not touch the glass envelope 6 Install in the reverse order of removal Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Wattage W Bulb No Headlight assembly High 65 9005 HB3 Low 55 9006 HB4 Park Turn 3457K Sidemarker 194 Side turn signal light if so equipped LED Front fog light if so equipped 880 Puddle light if so equipped 906LF Room map lights front Personal lights AL67 Footwell if so equipped i 158 Vanity mirror light if so equipped Step light if so equipped i 194 High mounted stop light cargo lights 912LF Rear comb
326. nd remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position In this case the pretensioner system may not function properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0885 1 SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the sur face of the sun visor SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration 1 59 PY LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light displaying RF in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits in clude the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor satellite sensors rollover sensor front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain and rollover air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring When the ignition key is in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warning light
327. nds on the batteries match the markings inside the compartment 3 Close the lid securely If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement close the lid se curely Ifyou will not be using the remote control for long periods of time remove the batteries Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the DVD player or not at all Be careful not to touch the battery terminal An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local regu lations for battery disposal When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the remote control and head phones FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 65 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control s
328. nenaes noy epia 7 5 Removing Spots 6 cece eee eee eect eens 7 3 Corrosion protection 00 0eceeeeeeeeeeeee 7 5 Underbody 2 sisi wisisis tinge Bie aehsse gu sine henge Me 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle GIASS ssc 555 cbu santen nuestra esin sean deg ages 7 3 COMOSION e e e E E nape E ER 7 5 Aluminum alloy wheels 000eee eee 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of Chrome parts 6002 60 00 02s tenore tupie eine 7 3 COMOSION Mind E E E E se 7 5 Tire dressings errs sce li ennui ieren warnes 7 3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 Cleaning interior 00 e eee eee eee ee 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
329. nents should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times
330. never the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section SLIP Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits The road surface may be slippery Turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated 2 20 Instruments and controls Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF the transfer case is in the 4LO position PYA model or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not functioning properly This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper ating Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 sec onds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator
331. nfluence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information For descriptions specified for four wheel drive models a 25 mark is placed at the begin ning of the applicable sections items As with other vehicles with features for off road use failure to operate four wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read Driving safety precautions in the Start ing and driving section of this manual ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off road use As with other vehicles with features of this type fail ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On pavement and off road driving precautions and Avoid ing collision and rollover and Driving safety precautions in the Starting and driving sectio
332. nformation To display tire pressure information press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE screen is displayed Select the Tire Pressure key using the joystick and press the ENTER but ton Pressure indication in psi on the screen indi cates that the pressure is being measured After a few driving trips the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature In case of low tire pressure a message is dis played on the screen LOW PRESSURE Check All Tires AWARNING e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS f SETTINGS Display Vehicle Electronic Systems System Settings Navigation Guidance Voice Guidance Volume LHA0558 HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SET
333. ng from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position 5 14 Starting and driving Oke a wt amp WSD0187 To move the shift selector m Shift while depressing the brake pedal C gt _ Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting console After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the key is turned to the OFF position for any reason while the vehicle is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the key can be turned to LOCK P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal shou
334. ng trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer e For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual e If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage For additional information see Fuel recommen dation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option and Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion in this manual LPD0325 WARNING n LOOSE FUEL RS CAP l MPH e Qe aN LRS2005 To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise to remove 2 Loop the tether strap around the hook while refueling To install the fuel filler cap 1 Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube 2 Turn the fuel filler cap clockwise until it clicks The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Loose Fuel Cap warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the odometer when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled To turn off the warning do the following 1 Remove and install the fuel filler cap as pre viously described as soon as possible 2 Tighten the fuel filler cap until it clicks 3 Press the loose fu
335. nger compartment fuse boxes Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 LDI0457 LDI0380 If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment WDI0452 U FNN LDI0618 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good conditio
336. not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse or L Low Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up e Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident ACAUTION e When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by de pressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of conirol The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation Starting and driving 5 13 The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifti
337. ns A C LEFT RIGHT UON WHA1362 Type A 4 20 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual Type B if so equipped AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Fan speed control dial Air recirculation button Temperature control dial Air conditioner button Air flow control dial Rear window defroster switch if so equipped CONTROLS Fan control dial oaRWON gt The fan control dial turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed WHA0535 Type B Air flow control dial The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets MAX Air flows from center and side A C conditioning vents with maximum cooling air 74 Air flows from center and side vents 474 Air flows from center and side vents and the
338. nt passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by a passenger the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section 1 17 AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an
339. ntrol dial to the position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield A 1 Turn the air flow control dial to the position 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired position 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Whenthe position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the A C button will not come on and A C will not appear on the display if so equipped if the outside tem perature is more than 36 F 2 C If in EA the mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the vehicle is shut off This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 23 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and pushin the 4 button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner
340. number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session International For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters please say international When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the f4 button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands e Help The system announces the avail able commands e Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone S
341. o Automatic anti glare rearview e This gauge is not designed to indicate mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust low automatic transmission fluid level With the ignition switch in the ON position press ments section Use the dipstick to check the fluid level the or button as described in the See 5 speed automatic transmission charts below to activate various features of the fluid in the Maintenance and do it automatic anti glare rearview mirror yourself section Type A o if the E N E eee trans Push andhold Feature cone u t SEEE PER enor 0 Push button again for about 1 sec ma ange 75 0 DEC MenClela gt SOONaS button for about ond to change settings safely possible Have the vehicle 1 d display togg off checked by a NISSAN dealer Contin ET E ued operation of the vehicle may seri j he i i ene ae ously damage the transmission caus ene Compass zone can be changed to 11 seconds h correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Type B Push and hold Feature the N Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to 8 seconds f correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Instruments and controls 2 9 WIC0904 Type A COMPASS DISPLAY Pushthe or button for about 1 sec ond when the ignition switch is placed in
342. o equipped Front passenger air 2 19 bag status light High beam indicator 2 19 light Blue Malfunction indica 2 19 tor light MIL Security indicator 2 20 light if so equipped Slip indicator light 2 20 Illustrated table of contents 0 9 Indicator Name light Turn signal hazard 2 20 oO indicator lights 20 we Vehicle Dynamic 2 Control VDC off indicator light 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front manual captain s chair seat adjustment if so equipped 6 6 eee eee eects Front manual bench seat adjustment if so equipped 6 cece eee Front power seat adjustment if so equipped 2 eee cece eee Armrests if so equipped 6 cece eee eee Head restraints serier caters iawn torie ipres Flexible Seatingis isc cicdewedei ade teagedenek oe Seat Delis api sec E E a E ie g Precautions on seat belt usage u un Pregnant WOMeM spegnere a ee ne EE Injured PerSon S oeiia eneren ennie mraos aai Three point type seat belt with retractor Two point type seat belt without retractor center of the front bench seat if so equipped erranera eee eters Seat belt extenders 00 2 eee eae Seat belt maintenance 000 Child safety cai ds bee iiaeetobae pelea OE MANS Sea cdes ee neta aE EE REEE AE Smallghild emerin a Larger children sass cicicien nea vr aw eteeenn
343. o equipped This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates the cruise control system is operational 2 24 Instruments and controls Cruise set switch indicator if so equipped This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the indicator blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not function ing properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Transfer 4LO position indicator pY model This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch placed in the ON position If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position and the indicator blinks stop the vehicle drive slowly forward and the indicator will turn on When you shift between 4H and 4LO stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neutral position then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you have first stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector to N Neutral Make sure the transfer 4LO posi tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The indicator may blink while shifting from
344. o NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers
345. o idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start DRIVING THE VEHICLE ENGINE PROTECTION MODE The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem perature becomes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer When the engine temperature reaches a certain level The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position Engine power may be reduced The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned OFF for a short time the blower will continue to operate Engine power and under some conditions ve hicle speed will decrease Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points You can also shift manually As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON If
346. o lock and unlock the tailgate TIE DOWN HOOKS For your convenience tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box The weight of the cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and the rear axles e All cargo should be securely fastened with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Entry exit function LPD0260 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory sys tem 1 Place the shift selector in the P Park posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch For additional infor mation see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint sy
347. o the 7 position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows 1 Turn the air flow control dial to the eV position 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the win dows turn the fan control dial to the right and the temperature control to the full HOT position When the HY position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the A C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The x mode automatically turns off al lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas senger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Push the CS button to the OFF position The indicator light on the C button will go off will appear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow co
348. o the front of the 6 5 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING AWARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon Bluetooth XM Radio requires subscription sold separately Not avail able in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit www xmradio com 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the
349. o tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the right front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the right front passenger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light i
350. ob again to store the setting e Disc number mode displays the selected disc number and the track number that is currently being played Folder number mode displays the selected folder number and the track number that is currently being played Track title mode displays the track title of the MP3 WMA file Artist title mode displays the artist title of the MP3 WMA file e Folder title mode displays the folder name given to the MP3 WMA folder Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 47 Display satellite radio display mode if so equipped To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio if so equipped press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows Name Title Current display mode To change the default display mode press the AUDIO button to display mode and press the TUNE button to select the following display modes Channel number gt Channel name Name gt Title Once the display mode is selected press the AUDIO button again to store the setting If the AUDIO button is not pressed after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the last selected display mode setting Channel number mode displays the channel number of the selected satellite radio sta tion Channel name mode displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station Name mode displays the name of the artist host or we
351. oblems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands in this section 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly eG y k 1 noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker Adaptation SA mode in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phone book in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book 4 80 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Break in schedule 0 2ses0deeagadeyees eee Meas 5 22 Fale gas Cele monoxide 5 2 Increasing fuel economy 00 0eee
352. ode When the manual shift mode button is pressed while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manually In the manual shift mode the shift range is dis played on the position indicator in the meter After pressing the manual shift mode button the posi tion indicator first displays M4 Fourth Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M4 Fourth For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M3 M4 M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter M3 Third Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M3 M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter M2 Second Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter M1 First Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on the meter Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the shift selector to the up side
353. ogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS e Do not leave the bulb out of the head light reflector for a long period of time as dust moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per formance of the headlight e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer NOTE Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FOG LIGHTS if so equipped Replacing the fog light bulb ACAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e Use the same number and wattage as origi
354. ol to adjust the brightness of instru ment panel lights when driving at night WIC1253 WIC1254 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal To signal a lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position if so equipped the head lights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected Instruments and controls 2 33 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH r LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING e If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive
355. omatic braking to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to the wheel on the same axle with more trac tion The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel which helps redirect power to the other wheel On4WD models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes If 4WD mode is engaged the ABLS system operates for both drive axles On 2WD vehicles the ABLS system operates on the drive axle only e The ABLS system is always ON In some conditions the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off If the system is automatically turned off normal brake func tion will continue ABLS will function even when the VDC system is turned OFF The ABLS does not operate if both wheels on a drive axle are slipping Starting and driving 5 33 AWARNING e The ABLS system helps provide in creased traction but will not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering opera tion or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces Al ways drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap proved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the ABLS system may not operate properly This could adversely af fect vehicle handling performance and the slip indicator light may illuminate If b
356. ommended fuel lubricants aoaaa oaaae 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oil 8 10 Changing engine oilfilter 8 11 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Checking engine oillevel 8 9 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine cooling system 8 7 Engine oll es ca eee bea eed 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 6 Engine oil viscosity 0 9 6 Engine serialnumber 9 11 Engine specifications 9 8 Starting the engine 5 12 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 7 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 English metric setting 0 4 10 Enter button saioe sac taer Sga ne eee 4 2 Event data recorders n a anaa 9 42 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 F Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Flat tires See a ae ee ERA a e RA O 6 2 Floor mat positioningaid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid 2 ameg 2 4 deg a0 aca dw 8 12 Capacities and recommended fuel ubricants e 2 ic 4 eae a ad 9 2 Engine coolant 000 4 8 7 Engin Ol seas es ge ere ee a 8 9 Power steering fluid 8 12 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 F M V S S certification label 2 2 9 11 Fog light SWitchie 2 22 G23 8 Beata ae 8 2 33 Front air bag system
357. on For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis sion and repair it if necessary PARKING BRAKE AWARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle e Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident Starting and driving 5 19 CRUISE CONTROL if so equipped 5 LSD0158 ___ACCEL RES m 3 CANCEL 4 ON
358. on 5 37 Starting the engine 00 cece eee eee 5 12 Freeing a frozen door lock 0ss0eeseuees 5 37 Driving the Vehicle sce scene ek aw ede s eee tees 5 12 Anti freeze oo ccc ccc ccccccucccueccueecueennns 5 37 Engine protection mode eeeeeeeee4 5 12 Bag ne a chee tn ee 5 37 Automatic transmission 00 000 cece eee ee 5 13 Draining of coolant water 0 0 eeeess eens 5 37 Parking brake 24 krni anemiaren aera wana 5 19 Tire equipment s coaie rse eee eee eee eee eee 5 37 Cruise control if so equipped eee eee 5 20 Special winter equipment 005 5 38 Precautions on cruise control 0 005 5 20 Driving On SNOW OF ICE reres isser eee 5 38 Cruise control operations 55 5 21 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 38 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecu
359. on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain and rollover air bag systems The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Inst
360. oners when recommended by the tire chain manufac turer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully load ing your vehicle when using tire chains In addi tion drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads WDI0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section in this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure e Retighten the wheel nuts when th
361. or gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver WIC0986 WIC0987 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK ig To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require
362. or seat belt routing WRS0916 Forward Facing step 4 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 WRS0917 Forward Facing step 5 5 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the re straint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 1 40 6 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 5 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0392 Anchor point access INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP Rear bench seat To access the anchor points behind the rear bench seat tilt the rear seatback forward by lifting up on the pull strap behind the seat back WRS0423 Re
363. ors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the LOCK position the door can be opened only from the outside REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The remote keyless entry keyfob trans mits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com munication systems Do not operate the remote keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight It is possible to lock unlock all doors turn on the interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle Some settings for the keyfob such as horn beep can be adjusted For vehicles without navigation system refer to Silencing the horn beep feature in this section For vehicles with navigation sys tem refer to Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section in this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
364. ositioning aid in this section The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Mats should be main tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn wo LAIO009 Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two driver s side front floor mat brackets and one passenger s side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passenger s side has one grommet hole Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
365. oss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and 5 6 Starting and driving avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli sions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels leave the road surface maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the
366. ou for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct the system asks for a location Home Office Mobile or Other For example say Home The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number The system then asks if you would like to store another location for
367. ou wash the windshield 2 28 Instruments and controls ACAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH LICO488 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH 0 GY LIC1173 Type B NOTE If the rear power window if so equipped is lowered while the defroster switch is on the rear window defroster will automati cally shut off The heated outside mirrors if so equipped will remain on The rear win dow defroster will autom
368. ould be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision 1 23 CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD AWARNING RESTRAINTS e Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the stron gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Forward facing child restraint in stallation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that wi
369. ove your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so ACAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the transmission into P Park 6 Make sure the oop indicator light if so equipped indicates the transfer case is in 4H 4L or 2H and that the ATP light is off If the obo indicator light is flashing or the ATP light is ON make sure the transmission is in P Park A T and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H See Automatic transmission park warning light in the Instruments and te controls section and Using four wheel drive 4WD in the Starting and driving section Turn off the engine To drive away 1 a e O P D Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle
370. oved until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position When removing the key from the ignition switch make sure the shift selector is in the P Park position If the shift selector is not returned to P Park position the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position 5 10 Starting and driving To remove the key from the ignition switch 1 Shift the shift selector to the P Park posi tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch If the shift selector is shifted to the P Park position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position proceed as follows to remove the key 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Place the ignition switch slightly toward the ON position 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 4 Remove the key The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch The shift selector can be moved if the igni tion switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ON positions The OFF position is indicated by a 1 on the ignition switch For models withou
371. ower door lock switch if so equipped 2 cee eect een eee 3 4 Wide Open doors if so equipped 3 5 Automatic door locks if so equipped 3 6 Child safety rear door lock Crew Cab models only 0000eeeeeeeeee 3 7 Remote keyless entry system if so equipped 3 7 How to use remote keyless entry system 3 8 FV OGG i sric teths uid net eaanalat wlan pea e EEE Ei 3 11 Fuelfiller door ieee csc dt eanna teaa iea ENA 3 12 F elfiller CAD car srslicctitaen sveinn nonan aR 3 12 Steering wheel uuuusesrrerrrrurrrrrrrrrrrrrrr 3 14 TiltOperations errs csiecceswereiawond epn es tans 3 14 Pedal position adjustment if so equipped 3 14 SUAMISONS ise raae Hela edaga dawn wharde a 3 15 Vanity mirrors if so equipped 0 eee 3 16 IMIR ONS resi cuits senaccte suas ase a dian D EEn LEi 3 16 Rearview mirror if so equipped 5 3 16 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped 6 ieee eects 3 17 Outside miot 6 ois ceca eed oeeed a E a 3 18 TUCK DOK Sad datas Sasi aa a tannin Seana vats eT 3 22 Vallgatesc2 ss2004 caetes Geteibaoeesaendeawe et 3 22 Tie down HOOKS viceceie ves eveae hed eeledeee 3 23 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 24 Memory storage function c cece eee 3 24 Entry exit fUNCtION 2 ce eee cee ee 3 26 System Ope ratiON waves car en sea aaa ess Wes 3 26 KEYS 3 WPD01
372. p prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury The Utili track channel system allows you to move tie down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load The tie down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail If the tie down cleat is not seated in the notches it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be properly tightened The bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight 20 40 inch pounds Check the tightness of the tie down cleat peri odically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose Install the tie down cleat as follows 1 Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed Properly store the channel protectors 2 Loosen the center bolt completely 90 LTI0103 3 Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicu lar to the channel as shown Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90 and slide it to the de sired location LT10104 4 Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom fully seat into the channel detents Technical and consumer information 9 17 WT10124 5 There should be no gap between the bottom of the cleat and the top of the channel Tighten the center bolt hand tight 20 40 inch pounds 9 18 Technical and consumer information LTI0106
373. peak digits Dial 1 Press the F wheel A tone will sound button on the steering 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Call International to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters 3 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 4 72 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say In ternational See How to say numbers in this section for more information 4 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 5 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the C4 button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the yee on the steering wheel button NOTE If you do not wish to take the call
374. peration have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Starting and driving 5 23 TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions 2WD 4H and 4LO so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions 2WD or 4WD shift procedure AWD Shift Wheels Indicator Light 7 AWD shit Transfer 4LO position Ae Move the 4WD switch Rear wheels For driving on dry paved 2WD lt gt 4H roads Economy drive AWD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SELECT For driving on rocky sandy TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION PERFORM or snow covered roads THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT Neutral disengages the auto 1 Stop the vehicle matic transmission mechani 2 With the brake pedal depressed move the shift se i cal parking lock which will lector to the N position May blink allow the vehicle to roll Do 3 With the brake pedal depressed depress and turn not leave the transfer shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H position in Neutral 2 THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE For use when maximum TWEEN 4H AND 4LO OR 4LO TO 4H UNLESS YOU power and traction is re HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE DEPRESSED Illuminated quired for example on steep THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELEC grades or rocky sandy TOR TO NEUTRAL 3 muddy roads 1 Before moving the shift sele
375. peration while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Bluetooth WHA0878 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes e Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mend
376. playing will be re peated RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while the com pact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows RDM Normal RDM Tracks from the disc that is currently play ing will be played randomly A CD EJECT button When the button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off CD IN indicator CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on 4 40 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 5 PRESET z REAR ABC CD DVD t RADIO t AUX ON OFF 3 4 SEEK gt DISP TRACK lt lt TUNE pp SCAN FOLDER CAT RPT Aha 10 Ye n I J 6 8 9 MP3 WMA CD6 CHANGER 11 Loap G e13 CEO E E PUSH 12 PUSH POWER AUDIO i 1 2 3 4 5 6 46 ReDeS 14 VOLUME TUNES TRACK 15 WHA0864 Type A 1 SEEK TRACK button 6 CD DVD button 2 TUNE FOLDER CAT button 7 RADIO button 3 DISP button 8 AUX button 4 SCAN RPT button 9 REAR ON OFF button 5 PRESET A B C button 10 Arl speaker control button 11 12 13 14 15 16 LOAD button CD insert slot CD eject button POWER VOLUME control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons Tuning and AUDIO contro
377. pped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES 2 i lt LDI0455 Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passe
378. ppreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Tab e of Illustrated table of contents Co ntents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Instrument p nel ri i cticers ie tae ee nese eae es 0 6 Exterior frONtsc aad oz accatinnernatadne tie ne tel 2a ti as 0 3 Engine compartment check locations 0 8 Exterior rear 2 2 e eect iri sa eee eee 0 4 Warning indicator lights s s s ssas cee e eee eee 0 9 Passenger compartment 0 0c cece eae 0 5 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS i 2nd row seat belts P 1 13 2 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag P 1 45 3 Front seat belts P 1 13 4 Front seat Active Head Restraints 5 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 45 6 Seats P 1 2 7 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor P 1 54 8 Seat belt with pretensioner P 1 58 9 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 45 10 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children P 1 26 11 Top tether strap
379. pproximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction e If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting For additional information on heating and cooling see Heater and air con ditioner in this section The air recirculation amp gt button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 17 DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Air passed through heater core Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature button control dial BI LEVEL HEATING Q A Fan control dial Air passed through heater core Air recirculation Temperature button control dial Air conditioner button Air flow Air conditioner button Air flow controls controls z Air Air A C Airflow Temp Fan A C Air flow Tem Fan
380. protect the housing WDI0411 LD10410 Rear combination light If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all 4 tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the ve hicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pres sure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself For more details refer to Warning Indicator Lights and Audible Reminders in the Instruments and con trols section Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air condi tioner audio and phone systems section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving sec tion and Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section Tire inflation pressure Check
381. r backward Many hills are too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you may stall If you drive down them you may not be able to control your speed If you drive across them you may roll over Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill At the top there could be a drop off or other hazard that could cause an accident 5 8 Starting and driving If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill never at tempt to turn around Your vehicle could tip or roll over Always back straight down in R Reverse gear and apply brakes to control your speed Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade resulting in loss of control and an acci dent Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain Prop erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual This could cause your vehicle to roll over Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off road The steering wheel could move sud denly and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outsi
382. r cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions 3 Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition switch in the START position Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure If the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and hold it and then crank the engine Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts 5 12 Starting and driving Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds After cranking the engine release the accel erator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn ing the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Allow the engine t
383. r cargo and the weight of occupants in the camper The total cargo load should not exceed the truck s pay load weight rating and the camper s center of gravity should fall within the truck s recommended center of gravity location when installed AWARNING Overloading or improper loading can ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and performance and may lead to accidents PAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on the Tire and Loading Information label see Tire and Loading Information label in this section indicates the maximum total weight of passen gers optional equipment air conditioning trailer hitch etc and cargo that your vehicle is designed to carry Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Vehicle Loading Information earlier in this section for details Also check tires for proper inflation pressures See the Tire and Loading Information label MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight
384. r gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN If Transport Canada receives complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may request that NISSAN con duct a recall campaign However Trans port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or NISSAN You may contact Transport Canada s De fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1 800 333 0510 You may also report safety defects online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada s Road Safety Informa tion Centre at 1 800 333 0371 or online at www tc gc ca roadsafety To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1 800 387 0122 Technical and consumer information 9 41 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system
385. r loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck ACAUTION e When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing
386. r to maintain control of the vehicle but it can not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the SLIP indi cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light in the Instru ments and controls section If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and ore indicator lights come on in the instru ment panel The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system The OEE indicator illuminates to indi cate the VDC system is off When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The SLIP indicator flashes if this occurs All other VDC functions are off and the SLIP indicator will not flash The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position The comput
387. railer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage However fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quenily For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home A CAUTION e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage e Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication e For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufacturer s recommendations when using their product SNOW PLOW AWARNING Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Installing a snowplow may
388. rake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate e If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate 5 34 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving conditions the VDC System helps to perform the following functions Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle e Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function Ifthe 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO the BFF indicator light will come on and the VDC system will be turned off See Us ing four wheel drive 4WD earlier in this section Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi tions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer ing input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions The VDC system can help the drive
389. rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 23 TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents ACAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 24 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plu
390. rational 1 53 Pv Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The right front passenger air bag status light 2 is located under the climate controls The light operates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The 2 is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The 2 illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light 2 is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The right front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is oper ated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag
391. rator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The OEE indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section 2 36 Instruments and controls The Electronic Locking Rear Differential E Lock system can help provide added traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck To activate the E Lock system e the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position 4 wheel drive vehicles the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 mph 7 km h or less and the E Lock system switch must be turned ON When the E Lock switch is turned ON the indi cator light will flash until the system engages However if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged the indicator light will continue to flash The Anti Lock Brake ABS system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON Also the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON See Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system in the Starting and Driving section for further explanation and system limitations AWARNING e Never leave the E Lock system ON when driving on paved or
392. re Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check all 4 tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Starting and driving 5 3 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons includin
393. re combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright protection there next song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Music cuts off or skips 4 36 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems OoahoON gt 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ca S LD 1 TBC wens l co EM AM nl lt lt gt T J TUNE VOL RPT 4 s e PWR 10 9 8 WHA1075 PRESET A B C button 7 TUNE buttons CD eject button 8 RPT button MENU button CD insert slot CD button FM AM button PWR button VOL control knob RDM button Station select 1 6 buttons SEEK buttons FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion pr
394. re normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue king pin load To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 6 200 Ib 2812 kg e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 7 100 Ib 8221 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification char
395. red cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the lift gate and rear vent windows closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen ger compartment If you must drive with the lift gate or rear vent windows open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle e The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving
396. ren need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints
397. replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled For vehicles with a navi gation system see Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer MEMO Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 4 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Control panel buttons if so equipped How to use the joystick and ENTER button How to use the BACK button
398. rface roads inthe 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the automatic transmission shift selector lever to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD e If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL E Lock SYSTEM if so equipped The E Lock system can provide additional trac tion and should only be used when a vehicle has become or is becoming stuck This system oper ates by electronically locking the two rear drive wheels together allowing them to turn at the same speed The system is used when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using the 4LO position 4 wheel drive vehicles When added traction is required activate the E Lock system by pushing the switch ON See Electronic locking rear differential E Lock sys tem switch in the Instruments and Controls section Once the system fully engages the indi cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON When the system is activated both rear wheels will engage providing added traction The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to engage the system and the system will only engage up to approximately 4 MPH 7 km h Once the vehicle is free the system should be turned OFF and driving resumed The Anti Lock Brak
399. rheat If your vehicle overheats Owner s manual order form Owner s manual service manual order information s ir ee ee GE Parking Parking brake operation Parking parking on hills Pedal position adjustment PersonalllightS 2 4 02 2 8 gat aware ee 4 Phone Bluetooth hands free system Power Front seat adjustment Power door locks 0 5 Power outlet 0 2 t a E a Power rear windows Power steering fluid Power steering system Power windows Rear power windows Precautions Maintenance precautions On pavement and off road driving precautions Precautions on child restraints 1 24 1 30 1 34 Precautions on seat belt usage Precautions on supplemental restraint system Precautions when starting and driving Pre tensioner seat belt system Programmable features Push starting 00004 Radio Car phone or CB radio Compact Disc CD changer FM AM radio with compact disc CD playetes sii ea aiana Keke os al FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer Rear audio controls Steering wheel audio control switch Readiness for inspection maintenance UM 468t s ao eas Hee a og arg aed Rear audio controls Rear power windows Rear sliding window 4 1 41 Rear sonar system q es aote ee ee 5 36 Rear sonar system off switch
400. rning light comes on when the key switch is turned to ON It turns off soon after the engine is started If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section ACAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 2 16 Instruments and controls Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads in the 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD e If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Ky Low fuel warning light This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is conve nient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty O Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning
401. ro BRAKE CRUISE 5 CRUISE SET 6 4LO 7 WARNING 0 0 WARNING LOOSE FUEL S CAP CHECK TIRE PRESSURE LIC2006 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators f Door open warning 2 Low fuel warning 3 Low windshield washer fluid warning Parking brake warning NOS model Cruise main switch indicator if so equipped Cruise set switch indicator if so equipped Transfer 4LO position indicator PYZ 8 4WD shift indicator pgg model 9 Automatic transmission position indicator 10 Loose fuel cap warning 11 Check tire pressure warning Instruments and controls 2 23 Door open warning This warning illuminates when a door has been opened and the engine is running Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven Cruise main switch indicator if s
402. road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance
403. rol dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button _ Air recirculation button A C Button Fan control Air flow Temp control control Auto turns ON MAX COOL Auto turns A C LEFT ON HI RIGHT Air not passed through WHA1471 Type B Type B Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 27 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic if so equipped J ZZ ol O nk DI L an amp CI jam w GH D o 3 g LHA0877 Driver temperature control dial A C ON OFF button Front window defroster button Fan speed control dial System OFF button Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Air flow control buttons AUTO button SRO ONOARON gt O A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 28 Display screen heater air
404. rol dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows turn the fan contro dial to the right and the temperature control to the full HOT position When the OY position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the A C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off the fan is turned off or the A C button is used to turn off the compres sor even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than the g7 position This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The C mode automati cally turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Press the amp gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the VS button will go off 2 Press the Ji ar flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield D 1 Pressthe air flow control button
405. roof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof AWARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof Instruments and controls 2 53 LICO585
406. rotection The antifreeze solution con tains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional en gine cooling system additives are not necessary AWARNING e Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap ACAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is pre diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C If additional freeze protec tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue concentrate following the direc tions on the container If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is used follow the coolant manufacturer s instructions to maintain minimum anti freeze protection to 34 F 37 C The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system The life expectan
407. rs 3 Park ona level surface and apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park e Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance re Q wv WCE0044 Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks f at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury Getting the spare tire and tools 1 Fold up the rear bench seat Refer to Fold ing the rear bench seat in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual In case of emergency 6 3 F CS w LCE0093 WCE0150 WCE0151 2 Unscrew and remove the jack and tool kit 3 Assemble the two pieces of the jack rod Find
408. rt utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper e Do not use axle mounted hitches e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper do not make sharp turns The trailer may con tact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer When towing a 5th wheel trailer do not make sharp turns while driving or back ing The trailer may contact the vehicle and cause damage to both the trailer and vehicle Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bu
409. rval 4 5 Displaying the maintenance notice FOMINdE s fe 3 8 eee ee Hach G4 4 6 General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Resetting the maintenance interval 4 6 Seat belt maintenance 1 21 Setting ek ea he eed wd 4 5 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 19 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Manual windows 00005 2 51 MapilightS s sinnen 24 282 Re aR aS Od 2 56 Map pockets es acceso ee ees Gi ge ae 2 43 Meters and gauges 0 0 2 4 Instrument brightness control 2 32 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 17 INSIdSMITOF s sra ee eee SS 3 16 Outside mirrors dece a sopi eee 3 18 Vanity mirror 2 een oe nem raa 3 16 M sia ee Ga g 2 52 N NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES e se doe nb eee be Sane es 4 56 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer SYSTEMI z a a Sea is koe Bt S Ae 2 26 3 2 5 11 o Octane rating See fuel octane rating Odometer Oil Capacities and recommended fuel ubricants 2 64 ss ea i Changing engine oil Changing engine oilfilter Checking engine oillevel Engine oil Engine oil and oil filter recommendation Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light Engine oil viscosity Outside mirrors Ove
410. s tem section of this manual and Pedal posi tion adjustment and Outside mirrors ear lier in this section During this step do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the M button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the key removed from the ignition switch press the M button on the keyfob The driv er s seat accelerator and brake pedals and out side mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Confirming memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push t
411. s features see Compass display in the In struments and controls section of this manual OUTSIDE MIRRORS AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects WPD0170 Manual control type if so equipped The outside mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view oa A LPD0237 o C N LPD0279 Electric control type if so equipped The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Move the small switch 4 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch Trailer tow mirrors if so equipped AWARNING Objects viewed in the convex portion of the trailer tow mirror are closer than they appear Be careful when changing lanes or turning Using only the convex mirror could cause an accident Use the other mirrors or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust the top portion of the trailer tow mirror The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be moved manually in any direction for a better r
412. s located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself To replace the filter perform the following proce dure feu T w 1 WDI0619 1 Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord PITIN a an eri LDI0387 LDI0404 2 Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the filter cover NOTE The filters are marked with air flow arrows The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle The arrows should face downward 3 Insert the first filter into the housing and slide it over to the right Insert the second filter into the housing 4 Replace the filter cover 5 Install the glove box door 6 Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with c
413. s single digits The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system 4 70 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems WHA0879 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel 4 PHONE SEND Press the 4 button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call You can also use the 4 button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call See List of voice commands and During a call later in this section for more information MODE PHONE END Press the m button to cancel a VR session or end a call GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands in this section Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the lt than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END SF button to select a dif ferent language button for more
414. s its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification chart aes E LTI0161 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could
415. s not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light 2 located in the meter and gauges area 1 55
416. s of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044 AWARNING e Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re strained Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431 AWARNING Do not lean against doors or windows e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air AWARNING Bag System never install a rear facing Front seat mounted side impact supple child restraint in the front seat An in mental air bags and roof mounted curtain flating front air bag could seriously in side impact and rollover supplemental air jure or kill your child See Child re bags straints earlier in this section for z The side air bags and curtain and roll details over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear im pact or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 SS BES SESS D X LRS0396 SSS0162 Do not lean against door
417. s optional satel lite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam 1 2 4 5 6 P SEEK TRACK TUNE FOLDER CAT scan RPT RDM H M 7 E cD FMAM SAT AUX Disp 12 J 1 i i 8 9 10 11 MP3 WMA CD6 CHANGER 13 LOAD G gt T PUSH 14 PUSH POWER AUDIO ee 1 2 3 4 5 6 tag RDS VOLUME TUNE TRACK 17 WHA0866 Type C 1 SEEK TRACK button 6 H M button clock set buttons 2 TUNE FOLDER CAT button 7 PRESET A B C button 3 Display 8 CD button 4 SCAN button 9 FMAM button 5 RPT RDM button 10 SAT satellite radio button ATs 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 AUX button DISP button LOAD button CD insert slot CD eject button POWER VOLUME control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons Tuning and AUDIO control knob BASS MID TREBLE FADE and BALANCE No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 43 1 2 SEEK TRACK TUNE MA EOLDER CAT
418. s or windows Do not lean against doors or windows 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations LRS0421 SSS0159 AWARNING When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 WRS0405 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9 10 11 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental a
419. se try again Repeat the command ina clear voice Ifyou want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press the MRE button on the steering wheel at any time Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system Ifyou want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the 4 4 button on the steering wheel To speed the operation you can say multiple commands For example press the C4 button then say Phonebook New entry rather than Phonebook Wait for the voice feedback prompt then say New entry How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples e Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can
420. seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner in Pre driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive po sitioner operation 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park LRS0634 LRS0635 Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion Lumbar support driver s seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5
421. sed on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 9 40 Technical and consumer information AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you
422. shield washer fluid reser voir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and waiter Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened Ifthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING e Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear Suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and
423. son Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not LRS0341 LRS0342 place cargo higher than the seatbacks Folding the front passenger s seatback Lift up on the latch located on the upper In a sudden stop or collision unsecured flat if so equipped corner of the seatback to release the back of cargo could cause personal injury the seat This will enable you to fold the front To fold the front passenger s seatback flat for passenger seatback flat over the seat cush extra storage length when transporting long ian items 3 To return the front passenger s seat to a seating position lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to a proper seating position Release the lever to lock the seatback in position Slide the seat to the rear most position Then lift up on the recline lever located on the outside of the
424. sor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself DRIVE BELT a a N WDI0661 NOaORON gt Power steering fluid pump Automatic belt tensioner Water pump Cooling fan Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft pulley Generator AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer 2 Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS ae Ee SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service platinum tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switc
425. ssible 7 6 Appearance and care ACAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 c eee eee 8 2 Replacing spark plugs ccc eee eee 8 17 General maintenance 20ce ee eee eee 8 2 AlbCleAN rc icided euries narea tirako easa ans woe 8 17 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 In cabin microfilter 00sec eee eee eee 8 18 Maintenance precautions 6 sees 8 5 Windshield wiper blades 000ce0eeeeeeee 8 19 Engine compartment check locations 0 8 6 ClOAMING AA E nacneeenas 8 19 Engine cooling system 00 cece cece eee eee 8 7 Replacing ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 20 Checking engine coolant level 0 005 8 8 Bara E tere
426. starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger e Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident LICO620 LIC1373 Adjustable if so equipped Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so that the cup is held securely Front Type B Instruments and controls 2 45 LICO622 Armrest if so equipped 2 46 Instruments and controls A pm Va 5 LIC0554 2nd row rear of front console if so equipped To open the 2nd row cup holders rear of front console lower the lid To close raise the lid LIC0556 2nd row bench if so equipped LICO558 Bottle holder Type A ACAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers Bottle holder Type B LICO624 LICO626 GROCERY HOOKS if so equipped The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side To access the grocery hooks fold up the rear bench seat See Folding the rear bench seat in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section
427. storage compartment 2 48 Overhead storage compartment 2 44 Storage bin sss ada a a pE e aE 2 44 Storage tray enc orie etpar bares 2 40 SUMVISONS 2 242040 Gee at e aume Se 3 15 Sunglasses case 2 0 2 2 0 0004 2 43 SUNOG e cas Bh sate ae Gr ars Set Geo E 2 52 Sunroof see Moonroof 9 52 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 59 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 60 2 18 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 52 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 59 Precautions on supplemental restraint Systemi a s Mie asa Aa ad RA See 1 45 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 45 Switch Autolight switch 000 2 30 Automatic power window switch 2 50 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch s s s aos reana toiii oei 2 36 Foglig tswiteh soss ceo gaiton ad 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 10 6 Ignition S Withes 02 2402 ae a ae aes 5 9 Power door lock switch 3 4 Rear sonar system off switch 2 37 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIG hS a G2 Sonate are Bo ERR Bad 2 28 Turn signal switch 2 000 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWIG 3 ia ae Sed oe SS es 2 36 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 T Tachometer e i 44224 GG bdo eee dee 3 2 6 Tail
428. sult in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury e Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury Engine block heaters are available through NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater tT 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 39 MEMO 5 40 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency FACING fcc cane orate nte iat E eae ene es 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing flatitiresc dc csiend eresse bebe en seater 6 2 JUMP Stating
429. t 15 100 Ib 6849 kg Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 9 200 lb 4173 kg 7 100 Ib 3221 kg 6 200 Ib 2812 kg GVWR GVW 900 Ib 408 kg Available for tongue king pin weight 15 100 Ib 6849 kg 6 200 Ib 2812 kg GCWR GVW 8 900 lb 4036 kg Capacity available for towing 900 Ib 408 kg 8 900 Ib 4036 kg Available tongue weight Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings Technical and consumer information 9 27 TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION Towing load specification chart with tow package short wheel base ND OC SV OCS oy a S Maximum Towing 9 200 Ib 9 400 Ib 9 30
430. t NISSAN vehicle immo bilizer system when the ignition switch is in the OFF position the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel turn the ignition to the LOCK position Remove the key To unlock the steering wheel insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi tion turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder KEY POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position 0 OFF Not used 1 ACC Accessories 2 This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal operating position 3 This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories START 4 This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the key It automati cally returns to the ON position NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the follo
431. t is OFF This light indicates that the automatic transmis sion parking function is not engaged If the trans fer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift selector is in the P Park position the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock Brake warning light BRAKE or This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer AWARNING e Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous e Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopp
432. t uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Automatic transmission P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer imm
433. te any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Mu
434. that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly e Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R e Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion e 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA CD Compact disc with MP3 or WMA Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversio
435. the ON position to toggle the compass direction display on or off The display will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading N North E East S South W West 2 10 Instruments and controls LICO583 Type B If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles WIC0355 Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Press and hold the button for about 11 seconds or the button for about 8 seconds The current zone number will ap pear in the display Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map Refer to the illustration 3 Pressthe orthe button repeat edly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the dis play Once you have selected a zone num ber the display will show a compass direc tion within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii Inaccurate compass direction The compass display
436. the band as follows AM FM or SAT satellite if so equipped When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the POWER VOLUME control knob is pressed ON No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception Pe gt gt TUNE FOLDER CAT button Type A B C and D only Manual tuning To manually tune the radio TUNE FOLDER CAT button lt 44 turn the tuning knob to right or left press the or P gt or To move quickly through the channels press and hold either the 44 or PP button down for more than 1 5 seconds PP gt gt CAT FOLDER tuning button Type E only Manual tuning To manually tune the radio press the CAT FOLDER
437. the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other couniry state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result 9 10 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION na LTI0085 LTI0086 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown WTI0095 a Ze WTI10099 o oo C t euT TTN WTI10189 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the
438. the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep
439. the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off ACAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Instruments and controls 2 35 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL E Lock SYSTEM SWITCH if so equipped VDC OFF WIC0534 LIC0729 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accele
440. the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions ACAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 WDI0504 CHANGING ENGINE OIL i Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug 8 with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter in this section e Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly e Check your local regulations AWARNING e Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible e Keep use
441. the oval shaped opening above the middle of the license plate Pass the T shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch located directly above the spare tire A CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown 6 4 In case of emergency Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle Seat the T shaped end of the jack rod into the T shaped opening of the tire winch Ap ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Once the spare tire is completely lowered reach under the vehicle remove the retainer chain and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle ACAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspend ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support
442. the same name If you do not wish to store another location the system ends the VR session Edit Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry When prompted by the system say the name of the entry you wish to edit The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit Say the name of the location The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 75 The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have
443. this film ACAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels ACAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature e Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on t
444. tification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the Break in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fol low these recommendations for the future reli ability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing July 2010 16 Publication No OM1E OAGOUO Printed in U S A AGO D
445. time running light system Canada only 2 32 Instrument brightness control 005 2 32 Turn signal SWiHCA esse eei anrenti tiv aneeewee 2 33 Fog light switch if so equipped 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 0 008 2 34 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped 4 2 34 FOI E E E aca teat cataas Manan trast hana aaa 2 35 Heated seat if so equipped cece eee eee 2 35 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 2 36 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch if so equipped n 6c cece eee eee eee 2 36 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped 2 37 Tow mode SWitCh 0 0 0 cece eee eee 2 38 Power QUES iis coche Martian tek acoutinnd bdap aidan ae is 2 38 6 6 lt 2 0 ee ee ee E ce ee 2 40 Instrument panel storage trays 008 2 40 Console box if so equipped ee 2 40 Center armrest storage if so equipped 2 42 GIOVE DOX ssor u ipdoidscidudateucdddideds 2 42 Sunglasses holder if so equipped 2 43 Map pocket 22022 ccccescecttivesdiseadeaanwes 2 43 Seatback pocket if so equipped 2 44 Overhead console if so equipped 2 44 Cup WOlders ac essere arnon Saisie ele wera vale Ba 2 45 Grocery hooks if so equipped 0 5 2 47 Lockable bedside storage compartment if so equipped 2 cece cece sirais 2 48 WINDOWS iristea iwteee
446. ting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Ifthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle 1 25 LRS0429 LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you
447. tion information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system V2 LRS0316 T If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light Af may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning th
448. tion pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LT10102 SECURING THE LOAD For your convenience tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box Technical and consumer information 9 15 AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury 9 16 Technical and consumer information LTI0107 Side channels Header channel Channel sections 4 Floor channels UTILI TRACK CHANNEL SYSTEM if so equipped on A WARNING e Properly install and tighten the tie down cleats into the Utili track chan nel system Also do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel Failure to properly install the tie down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause per sonal injury e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to hel
449. tive Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 31 COMPACT LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc CD player ACAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time e Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely e The player may skip while driving on rough roads e The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use 4 32 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs
450. tive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance
451. to store the model If both of the memory locations are in use the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park 3 Press and hold the lt than 5 seconds 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND 4 button for the hands free phone system to enter the button for more 10 Tii Press the amp speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END SFF button to select a dif ferent language button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language earlier in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the 4 button The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded The system will ask you to say your name Follow the instructions to register your name The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has b
452. tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premaiure tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs Such interference can lead to decreased braking effi ciency and or early brake pad wear Re fer to Wheels and tires in the Techni cal and consumer information section of this manual for
453. trols 2 7 ACAUTION e This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section e If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine 2 8 Instruments and controls LIC1136 WIC1247 VOLTMETER if so equipped When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the voltmeter indicates the battery volt age When the engine is running it indicates the generator voltage While cranking the engine the volts drop below the normal range If the needle is not in the normal range 11 15 volts while the engine is running it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE if so equipped This gauge indicates the temperature of the au tomatic transmission fluid The automatic trans mission fluid temperature is in the normal range C when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in For information about the automatic anti glare A CAUTION A S i u F dicates the heading direction of the vehicle feature refer t
454. ts on and off Initially if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF Pd or 2 position LICO836 WIC1252 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor C located on the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the O light illuminates Pull the lever back to select the low beam Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the Dd or 22 position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes Instruments and controls 2 31 After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the P4 or 2 position the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if the headlight switch is moved to the
455. tton is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle Select so the driver s seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for ease of exit and entry Remote Unlock Driver s Door First Select to change which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation Only the driver s door All the doors Keyless Remote Response Horn Select to turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 9 VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Return All Settings to Default LHA0565 NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the display screen will not show the current mode Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display screen control Keyless Remote Response Lights Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Auto Re Lock Time Select to set the length of time before doors automatically re lock Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights Select to change th
456. ture To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows turn the manual fan control to the maximum position e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean press the AUTO button to return to the auto mode e When the control is activated the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to op erate until the fan control is turned OFF the vehicle is shut off or the A C button is used to turn off the compressor even if an air flow button other than iY is selected This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode auto matically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control dial Turn the fan speed control dial SS left or right to manually control the fan speed or turn the system on or off Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle Push the AUTO button to return to automatic mode The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF floor or floor defrost mode Air flow control Press the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the a
457. turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after 5 seconds To turn the screen on e Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display Off key Then set the screen to on by press ing the ENTER button or e Hold the 2 button for approximately 2 seconds and the message resuming dis play will appear and the Display Off key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle Remote Unlock Driver s Door First Keyless Remote Response Horn Keyless Remote Response Lights Lock and Unlock vr LHA0559 Auto Re Lock Time Comp Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights jjj Automatic Headlights Off Delay gt Speed Dependent Wiper kd LHA0564 Vehicle electronic systems Select the Vehicle Electronic Systems key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but ton The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the joystick then pressing the ENTER button The indicator light box at the left of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER bu
458. uitable dis tance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finishers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 Cr ha Sit upright and well back WRS0031 A WARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents e The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section 1 46 The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a cr
459. upplemental restraint system 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS FRONT PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH SEAT AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur
460. used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position 2 Press the rd air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Press the A C button The indicator light onthe A C button will come on 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the V gt button to the ON position The indicator light on the C button will come on Be sure to return the gt to the OFF position for nor mal cooling The indicator light on the C amp gt button will go off You may also select MAX A C for quick cooling Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the C button will go off 2 Press the air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Press the A C button on The indicator light on the A C button will come on 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air con ditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly e The air conditioning system should be operated for a
461. utlet Instruments and controls 2 39 STORAGE LICO617 In truck box if so equipped Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with accessories that exceed 12 volt 120W 15A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory ACAUTION For the power outlet located in the bed of the truck do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt 120W 15A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory 2 40 Instruments and controls Side tray INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE TRAYS LICO565 AWARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sud den stop The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning Center tray if so equipped LICO566 CONSOLE BOX if so equipped LIC1369 LIC1370 x A we C SS LIC1371 Console box storage trays Console box storage Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid Console box lock Use the master key to lock or unlock the console box Instruments and controls 2 41 CENTER ARMREST STORAGE if so equipped To access the center armrest storage area lower the center armrest and lift the lid 2 42 Instruments and controls LI
462. ver rate than other types of vehicles They have higher ground clearance than passen ger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on pavement and off road applications This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems However they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to per form satisfactorily under off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns at high speeds As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Ti
463. ving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate prop erly and the SLIP indicator may flash or both the SLIP and OEE indicator lights may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the SLIP indicator may flash or both the SLIP and eRe indicator lights may illuminate This is not a malfunc tion Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the SLIP indicator may flash or both the SLIP and ie indicator lights may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road Starting and driving 5 35 REAR SONAR SYSTEM if so equipped WSD0103 AWARNING e Always turn and look back before back ing up The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects 5 36 Starting and driving e The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the
464. w 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme humidity conditions less than 10 or more than 75 ACAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system e Do not use excessive force on the moni tor screen e Avoid touching or scratching the moni tor screen as it may become dirty or damaged LHA0049 HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD ACAUTION e Handle a DVD by its edges Never touch the surface of the disc To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion e Do not use a conventional record cleaner benzine thinner or alcohol in tended for industrial use Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 63 A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Never attempt to use a DVD that has been cracked deformed or repaired using adhesive Doing so may cause damage to the equipment Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami nation or flaws Otherwise signals may not be read properly Do not write draw or attach anything on any side of the DVD Do not store the DVD in locations with direct sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity Always place discs in the storage case when they are not being used Do not put on
465. ward or rewind a track on a CD MP8 CD e While playing an MP3 CD press the TUNE FOLDER CAT button 44 or gt gt to scan backward or forward through avail able folders Press and hold the TUNE FOLDER CAT button 44 or P gt to fast forward or re wind a track on an MP3 CD aa gt gt CAT FOLDER button Type E only CD While playing a CD press the CAT FOLDER button 44 or P gt wind a track on a CD MP3 CD While playing an MP3 CD press the CAT FOLDER button 44 or P gt to scan backward or forward through available fold ers e Press and hold the CAT FOLDER button 44 or gt gt to fast forward or re wind a track on an MP3 CD CD select buttons to fast forward or re To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 SCAN RPT button Type A B D and E only When the SCAN RPT play button is pressed while the compact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT All discs loaded will be repeated 1 DISC RPT The disc that is currently playing will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT The track that is currently playing will be repeated ALL DISC RDM Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM Tracks from the disc that is cur rently playing will be played randomly RPT RDM button Type C only When the RPT RDM pl
466. when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call or Call International Phone Book Memo Pad Setup When you press and release the 4 button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response When you get used to the menus in the system you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time For example say Call five five five one two one two or Memo pad record Also when you get used to the system re sponses you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel However if you press the lt button whe
467. wing pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 sec onds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and windshield washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least when ever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Check that all doors are closed Position seat and adjust head restraints Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi tion See Warning indicator lights and au dible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Starting and driving 5 11 STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The shift selecto
468. witch P 2 27 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 14 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped P 2 34 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 37 32 Pedal position adjustment switch if so equipped P 3 14 33 Rear power window switch if so equipped P 2 51 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Instruments and controls 2 3 METERS AND GAUGES rn i 9 8 WIC1243 1 Warning indicator lights 7 Automatic transmission fluid tempera 2 Tachometer ture gauge if so equipped 3 Engine coolant temperature gauge 8 Odometer Twin trip odometer Vehicle 4 Voltmeter if so equipped Information Display 5 Fuel gauge 9 Engine oil pressure gauge 6 Speedometer if so equipped 2 4 Instruments and controls WIC1244 ca co gt 5 a Zz 0 g 7 D zZ 5 co C3 y D Z v WIC1245 1 Speedometer The twin trip odometer records the distance of 2 Odometer twin trip display individual trips 3 Change button SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been dr
469. witch in the ACC or ON position the system start up warning is dis played on the screen Read the warning and select the OK key by pressing the ENTER but ton If you do not press the ENTER button the Navi gation system will not proceed to the next step in the Navigation display If you do not touch a button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the system start up warn ing screen the screen will change to the audio screen automatically To proceed to the next step refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 3 TRIP 1 8 33 OK OR kK 1l Elapsed Time Driving Distance RRR KR K niles Average Speed EEk o MPH LHA0552 HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON When the TRIP button is pressed the following modes will display on the screen Warning message if any gt TRIP 1 TRIP 2 gt FUEL ECONOMY MAINTENANCE Audio or OFF TRIP 1 Each trip display tracks an independent trip and displays the following Elapsed Time Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes Driving Distance Distance driven mile or km since the last reset e Average Speed Average speed driven MPH or km h since the last reset Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 Each trip screen can be reset to 0 Press the TRIP button to select the TRIP screen to be res
470. witch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the amber light on the overhead console illumi nates and the system is ready to accept voice commands Ifthe 4 button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will an nounce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly e Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds e Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the f button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them Ifa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Plea
471. witch up or down to increase or decrease the volume 4 54 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems AVA AN Tuning Memory change radio While in one of the preset radio station banks A B or C push the tuning switch W or N for less than 1 5 seconds to change to the next preset station in memory Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch V or 4N for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station Next Previous track CD Push the tuning switch V or for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks This system searches for the blank intervals be tween selections If there is a blank interval within 1 program or there is no interval between pro grams the system may not stop in the desired or expected location Change disc CD Push the tuning switch V or 4N for more than 1 5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down 2 4 la gt A MODE FAL NEXT A sar AM FM CD DVD AUX SEEK J OJ T J LHA0322 oarwn gt VOL volume control button MODE select button AA speaker control button NEXT button SEEK button Headphone jacks 7 Infrared headphone transmitter lens Red transmitters will be visible when infrared headphones are on REAR AUDIO CONTROLS if so equipped Pr
472. y a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Addition ally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle e If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Cor rect supplemental air bag and preten sioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal pro cedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 61 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel lt cei ce creweteesee te reeeeieaces 2 2 Meters and Qauges oie c66 cirrosi
473. ystem Class IV is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5 000 Ibs Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight distributing hitch system NOTE A weight distributing hitch system may af fect the operation of trailer surge brakes If you are considering use of a weight distributing hitch system with a surge brake equipped trailer check with the surge brake hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done Follow the instructions provided by the manufac turer for installing and using the weight distributing hitch system General set up instructions are as follows 1 Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within O 5 inches 0 13 mm of the reference height measured in step 2 The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2 AWARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height whe
474. ystem and other electronic parts AWARNING Acellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer 4 66 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle o
475. ystem to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session You can also issue the Transfer Call com mand again to return to a hands free call through the vehicle Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice 4 74 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phone book NOTE Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phone Book New Entry Edit Delete List Names The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system Each name can have up to 4 locations phone numbers associ ated with it NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B New entry Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts y

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

入札説明書 独立行政法人都市再生機構東日本賃貸住宅  McDonald's TC240M User's Manual    Page 1 Page 2 ー安全のため必ずお守りくださ い りここに示した注意  週刊介護情報第110号  OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND SERVICE MANUAL HOCKEY  TP-25 - Manual de Instalação  Milescraft 12930203 Instructions / Assembly    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file